Nokia 6630 User Manual
R0915_en.book Pag e 1 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibility that the product RM-1 is in conformity wi th the provisions of the following Council Direct ive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://ww w.nokia.com/ phones/declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2004-2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, d istribution or stor age of part or all of the contents in th is document in any form without the prior w ritten permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Conne cting People, and Pop-Port are trademarks or registere d trademarks of Nokia Corporation. O ther product and co mpany na mes mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradename s of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998-200(4). Symbian and Symbian OS are tr ademarks of Sym bian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registe red trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Bluetooth is a registered tradem ark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or m ore U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 51 26739, 5146221, and 5414425. Ot her patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other p atents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2004. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserve d. USE OF THIS PRODU CT IN ANY MANNER THAT C OMPLIES WITH THE M PEG-4 VISUAL STAND ARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCE PT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) D ATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERA TED BY AND OBTAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CO NSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPRISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSON AL USE ONLY; AND (B) O THER USES SPECIFICALL Y AND SEPARATELY LICE NSED BY MPEG LA, L.L.C. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reser ves th e right to make changes and impr ovements to any of the prod ucts described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or i ndirect damage s howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. Except as requ ired by appl icable law, no warr ant ies of any kind, either exp ress or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchant ability and fitness for a particul ar purpose , are made in relation to the accuracy, reliabili ty or contents of this document. Nokia re serves the right to revise this document or w ith draw it at any time without prior notice The availability of particular product s may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Export Controls This device may contain commodities, technology or soft ware subje ct to export laws and r egulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrar y to law is prohibited. FCC INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE R0915_en.book Pag e 2 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, wh en using a telephone in close proximit y to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assis tance, cont act yo ur local service facility. This device complies with par t 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two con ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful i nterference, and (2) this device must accept any int erference received, including interfere nce that may cause undesired oper ation. ISSUE 3 EN, 9234401 R0915_en.book Pag e 3 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
4 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents FOR YOUR SAFETY .......................... .......... 8 Personalising your phone . ....................... 11 Profiles - setting tones ............. ............ ........... ........... ....... 12 Offline profile .................. ........... ........... ............ ......... .. 12 Themes - the look of your phone .......... ............ ........... .. 13 Your phone ........................ ....................... 15 Essential indicators.. ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ....... 15 Clock ........ ........... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ......... 16 Clock settings ...... .......... ........... ........... ......... ............ .... 16 World clock ................. ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... 17 Volume control and built-in lou dspeaker ........... ......... 17 File manager - ma naging memory............... ........... ....... 17 Viewing memory consumption....................... ......... 18 Memory low - freeing memory ...................... ......... 18 Memory card tool .......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... 19 Formatting a memory card ................ ............ ........... 20 Making calls ..................................... ........21 Making a voice call.. ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ .... 21 Making a video call...... ........... ......... ........... ............ .... 21 Speed dialling a phone number ... ........... ......... ....... 22 Making a conferenc e call (network service) ........ 23 Answering or rejecting a c all....................... ........... ......... 23 Answering or rejecting a video ca ll............ ............ 24 Call waiting (netwo rk service) ........... ............ .......... 24 Options during a call ............... ........... ............ ......... ... 24 Log ................. ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ... 25 Recent calls ........ ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ...... 25 Call duration ....... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ...... 25 Packet data .................. ............ ......... ........... ......... ........ 26 Monitoring all communication events ...... ............ 26 Contacts (Phonebook) ............................. 28 Saving names and numbers ........ ........... ........... ............ ... 28 Using default numbers and a ddresses......... .......... 28 Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory ........... ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... .......... 29 SIM directory and other SIM services ................... 29 Adding ringing tones for contacts ........................... ...... 29 Voice dialling .......... ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ......... . 30 Adding a voice t ag to a phone number ................ 30 Making a call by saying a voice tag.................... ... 31 Creating contact groups ................ ......... ........... ............ ... 31 Removing members from a group ......... .............. ... 31 Camera and Gallery .................. ............... 32 Camera .................. ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... ...... 32 Taking pictures ............... ........... ........... ......... ............ ... 32 R0915_en.book Pag e 4 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
5 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Taking pictures in a sequence .................... ........... ...34 You in the picture - s elf-timer ...................... ..........34 Adjusting came ra settings........ ............ ......... ........... .34 Recording videos .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... . 35 Adjusting video rec order settings ................. ..........36 Gallery.............. ........... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... .36 Viewing images ................ ........... ............ ........... ......... .37 Media .................. ..................................... 38 Video editor ............... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ........38 Editing video, sound, and tran sitions .................... .38 Movie director ............. ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ .....40 Settings............... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... .41 Image mgr. ............ ........... ......... ........... .......... ........... ......... ...41 Recorder ..... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ......... ........41 RealPlayer⢠...... ............ .................................................... ..... 41 Playing video or sound clips .... .......... .................. .....42 Streaming content over the air .............. .............. ...42 Receiving Rea lPlayer settings ........... ........... ........... .43 Messaging .................................. .............. 45 Writing text ........... ......... ........... ........... .......... ........... ......... ...46 Traditional text input................. ............ ........... ..........46 Predictive text input - Dictionary ............. ........... ...47 Copying text to clipboard ......... .......... .................. .....49 Writing and sending messages ................. ........... ............49 Receiving MMS and e -mail settings .......... ........... . 51 Inbox - rece iving messages .................... ......... ............ .....51 Receiving multimedia mess ages ................... .......... 52 Receiving logos, tones, busi ness cards, calendar entries, and settings ......... ............ ........... ........... ........ 52 Receiving Web service mes sages .............. ........... ... 53 My folders ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ..... 53 Mailbox ........... ........... .................................. ............ ......... ..... 53 Opening the mailbox .... ........... ..................... ......... ..... 54 Retrieving e-mail message s............ ............ ........... ... 54 Deleting e-mail messa ges ...... ............ ......... ........... ... 55 Disconnecting from the mailbox.. .......... ............ ..... 56 Outbox - messages waiting to be sent ........... ............. . 56 Viewing messag es on a SIM card .................. ............ ..... 57 Messaging settings ...... ........... ........... .......... ........... ......... ... 57 Settings for text mes sages ........... ........... ............ ..... 57 Settings for multimedia messages .................... ..... 58 Settings for e-mail ............... ........... ........... ............ ..... 59 Settings for Web service me ssages .............. .......... 61 Settings for cell broadcast (network service) .. .... 61 Other settings ............ ......... ............ ........... ......... .......... 62 Calendar and To-do ................................ 63 Calendar - creatin g calendar entries............... ............. . 63 Calendar views ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ..... 64 Setting a calendar ala rm ............... ........... ............ ..... 64 Calendar settings ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ... 65 To-do - task list ................ ......... ............ ........... ......... .......... 65 Web ..................... ..................................... 66 R0915_en.book Pag e 5 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
6 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Accessing the We b ......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... 66 Receiving browser settings............ ........... ............ .... 66 Keying in the settings manually ................ ............. 66 Bookmarks view.......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ .... 67 Adding bookmarks manually ....... ...................... ....... 67 Sending bookmarks............ ............ ........... ......... ......... 68 Making a connection ............ ........... ........... ............ ........... 68 Connection security.................. ........... ............ ........... 68 Browsing................. ........... ......... ......... ........... .......... ......... .... 69 Viewing saved pages .................. ............ ......... ........... 70 Downloading and purchasing items .......... ........... ......... 70 Ending a connection ............... ........... ............ ......... ........... 71 Emptying the cache .................... ............ ........... ......... 71 Settings for Web ........... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... 71 Organiser ............ ...................................... 73 Calculator .......... ......... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... 73 Calculating percenta ges .......... ........... .......... ........... .. 73 Notes ................ ........... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... 73 Go to - adding shortcuts ............ ...................... ......... ....... 74 Deleting a shortcut ............ ......... ............ ........... ......... 74 Converter - converting me asures ...................... ........... .. 74 Setting a base currency an d exchange rates ...... 75 Wallet ....... ......... ........... .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ....... 75 Creating a walle t code.................... ......... ........... ....... 76 Storing personal card details ................... ............ .... 76 Creating person al notes ................... ............ ........... .. 77 Creating a wallet profile .................... ............ ........... 77 Viewing ticket details............ ........... ........... ............ ... 78 Wallet settings ............ ............ ......... ........... ........... ...... 78 Resetting the walle t and wallet code ................ ... 78 IM - Instant Messaging (chat) ............... 80 Receiving IM sett ings ....... ............ ......... ........... ........... ...... 80 Connecting to an IM server ............ ........... ............ .......... 80 Modifying your IM settings ......... ...................... ......... ...... 81 Searching for IM groups and users ............. ........... ........ 81 Joining and leavin g an IM group .......... .............. ........... . 82 Chatting .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ......... ............ ......... . 82 Recording chats ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ... 83 Viewing and starting conve rsations ...................... ........ 83 IM contacts ........ ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... ........ 84 Managing IM groups................ ........... ......... ............ .......... 84 Administrating an IM group ......... ........... .................. ...... 85 Creating a new IM group ....... ......... ........... ............ ... 85 Adding and removing group members ...... ........... . 85 Chat server s ettings........... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........ 86 Connectivity ....... ...................................... 87 Bluetoot h connection .............. ........... ............ ......... .......... 87 Bluetooth settings........... ........... ........... .......... ........... . 87 Sending data using Bluetooth .................. ............ ... 88 Pairing devices ............ ............ ........... ........... ............ ... 89 Receiving data us ing Bluetooth ...... ............ ........... . 90 Switching off Bluet ooth .................. ......... ........... ...... 90 PC connections - usin g Bluetooth or USB ................... 90 R0915_en.book Pag e 6 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
7 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Using the CD-ROM ................... ............ ........... ......... ... 90 Using your phone as a modem ... .......... ........... ........90 Connection manager ................ ......... ............ ........... ..........91 Viewing data connection deta ils ............... ............. . 91 Sync - remote synchronisat ion....... ............ ........... ..........92 Creating a new synchronisation profile ... ............. 92 Synchronising data ........ ........... ............ ........... ........... . 93 Tools ........................................... .............. 95 Settings ......... ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ......... .95 Phone settings .................. ........... .......... ........... ........... .95 Call settings..................... ......... ........... ......... ............ .....96 Connection settings ................. ............ ........... ......... ...97 Date and time ............ ............ ........... ......... ........... ..... 101 Security ............. ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ....... 101 Call diverting .......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... 104 Call barring (network s ervice) ................. ............ .. 105 Network ..... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ..... 105 Enhancement s ettings .................. ........... ........... ..... 106 Voice commands ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ......106 Adding a voice command to an application ......106 Application manager ....... ............ ............................... ......107 Installing applications and so ftware ......... ..........107 Removing applications and soft ware ........ ..........108 Application settings ...... ........... ........................... ......109 Activation keys - handling c opyright protected files .... 109 Transfer - transferring content from another phone ..... 110 Device manager - service provider configuration.... 111 Server profile settings ........... ........... ............ ........... .111 Battery information .............................. 113 Charging and Discharging .................... ........... ............ ...113 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ...... ............ 113 ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION .. 114 Index 117 R0915_en.book Pag e 7 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
8 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. FOR YOUR SAFETY Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further inf ormation. SWITCH ON SA FELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY C OMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your han ds free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving sh ould be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical eq uipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wir eless phones can ca use interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use the phone at a refuelling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Us e only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIE D SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTE RIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a written record of all important information. CONNECTING TO OTHE R PHONES When connecting to any other phone, rea d its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. R0915_en.book Pag e 8 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
9 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. EMERGENCY CA LLS Ensure the phone function of the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed to clear the display and retu rn to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. ABOUT YOUR DEVICE The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900/1800/19 00, and UMTS 2000 network. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Network Services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wi reless network to function. These Network Services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize Network Services. Your service provid er may need to gi ve you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some ne tworks may have limitations that affect how you can use Network Services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language- dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Contact your service provider for more information. This wireless device is a 3G PP GSM Release 99 terminal supporting GPRS service, and is designed to support also Release 97 GPRS networks. However, there may be some compatibility issues when used in some Release 97 GP RS networks. For mo re informat ion, contact your serv ice provider. This device supports WAP 2. 0 protoc ols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e- mail and content downloading via browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Check the model number of any charger before use with this phone. This phone is in tended for use when supplied with power from ACP-12 an d LCH-12. R0915_en.book Pag e 9 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
10 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Your phone and its enhancements may contain smal l parts. Keep them out of reach of small ch ildren. R0915_en.book Pag e 10 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 11 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Personalising your phone Note: Your service provider/network operator may have requested a different order for menu items or the inclusion of differ ent icons in the phone menu. Contact your service provider/network operator or Nokia Customer Care for assistance with any features that differ f rom th ose described in this guide. ⢠To change the standby mode background image, or w ha t is sho wn in t he s cre en s ave r, see Themes - the look of your phone , p. âÂÂ13â . ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see P rofiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . ⢠To change shortcuts assigned for t he selection keys in the standby mod e, select Tools â Settings â Phone â Standby mode â Left selection key or Right se lection key . ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different presses of the Scroll key in the standby mode, see Standby mode , p. âÂÂ96â . ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Clock â Options â Settings . Scroll to Clock ty pe and select Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the Clock alarm tone, select Clock â Options â Settings . Scroll to Clock Alarm tone and select a tone. ⢠To change the Ca lendar alarm ton e, select Calendar â Op tions â Settin gs . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or animation, select Tools â Sett ings â Phone â General â Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ringing tone to a contact, select Contacts . See p. âÂÂ28â . ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, pr ess a numbered key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and pres s . Select a contact. To change the speed dialling status (pressing and holding a sp eed dial key in the standb y mode) to Off , select Tools â Settings â Ca ll â Speed dialling . Fig. 1 Standby mode with a new background image, a new selection key shortcut, UMTS networ k and Bluetooth activated. R0915_en.book Pag e 11 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 12 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To rearrange the main Menu, in the main Men u, select Options â Move , Mo ve to folder , or New folder . You ca n move less used applications into folders, and pla ce applications that you use more often into the main Menu. Profiles - setting tones To set and cust omise the ringin g tones, mess ag e alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press and select Profiles . You can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in the standby mode. If the General profile is in use, only the current date is shown. ⢠To change the profile, press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate and press OK . Tip! When you are choosing a tone, Tone downloads opens a lis t of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a W eb page to download tones. ⢠To modify a profile, select Profiles . Scroll to the profile and select Options â Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the c h o i c e s . T o n e s s t o r e d o n t h e m e m o r y c a r d are indicated with . You can scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. Press any ke y to stop the sound. ⢠To create a new profile, select Options â Create ne w . Offline profile Offline profile lets you use the phone without co nnecting to the wireless networ k. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned o ff, as indicated by in the signal strength indicato r. All wireless phone si gnals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send mess ages, they are p laced in Outbox to be sent later. R0915_en.book Pag e 12 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 13 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! For information on how to change the alert tone for Calendar or Clock, see Personalising your phone , p. âÂÂ11â . Warning: In Offline profile you cannot ma ke calls, except calls to cert ain emergency numbers, or use features that require network coverage. To make calls, change the profile to activate the phone fu nction. If the device has been locked, you must enter the unlock code before you can change the profile and make calls. Warning: Your device must be switched on to us e the offline profile. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, select another profile and select Options â Activate . Press Yes . The phone re-enables wireless transmissions (pro viding there is sufficient signal strength). If Bluetooth was activated before entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. Bluetooth will automatically be reactivated aft e r leaving the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 89. Themes - the look of your phone To change the look of your phone display, su ch as the wallpaper, colo ur palette, and icons, press and select Tools â Themes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other th emes or select images from Gallery to personalise themes further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the phone. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card without the memory card, save the themes in the phone memory f irst. Options in the Themes main view: Preview / Th eme downloads , Apply , Edit , Copy to mem. card , Copy to phone mem. , Help , and Exit . ⢠To activate a theme, sc roll to it and select Options â Apply . ⢠To preview a theme, scroll to it, and select Options â Preview . ⢠To edit themes, scroll to a theme and select Options â Edit to c hange the following options: ⢠Wallpaper - the image to be shown as a back ground image in the standby mode. ⢠Colour palette - the colours used on the screen. R0915_en.book Pag e 13 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 14 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Screen saver - the screen saver type: date and time, or a text you have writ ten yourself. See a lso Screen saver ti meout settings, p. âÂÂ96â . ⢠Image in 'Go to' - the background image for the Go to application. ⢠To restore the selected theme back to its original settings, selec t Option s â Restore orig. theme when you are editing a theme. R0915_en.book Pag e 14 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 15 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Your phone Essential indicators - The phone is being used in a GSM network. (network service) - The phone is being used in a UMTS network. See Network , p. âÂÂ105â . - You have received one or several messages to the Inbox folder in Messaging. - There are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See p. âÂÂ56â . and - You have missed calls. See Recent calls , p.âÂÂ25â . - Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , IM alert tone , and E-mail ale rt tone are set to Off . See Profiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . - The phone keypad is locked. See the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂKeypad lock (Keyguard)âÂÂ. - You have an ac tive alarm. See Clock , p. âÂÂ1 6â . - The second phone line is being used. See Li ne in use , p. âÂÂ97â . - All calls to t he phone are diverted to another number. If you have two phon e lines, the divert indicator for the first lin e is and for the second . - A headset is connected to the phone. - A loopset is connected to the phone. - The connection to a Bluetooth head set has been lost. - A data call is active. - A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is available. - A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is active. - Shown when the packet data connection is on hold. These icons a re shown instea d of the signal str ength indicator (shown in the top left corner in the standby mode). See Packet data co nnections in GSM and UMTS networks , p. âÂÂ98â . - An UMTS packet data connection is available. - An UMTS packet data connection is active. - An UMTS packet data connection is on hold. - Bluetooth is active. - Data is being transmit ted using Bluetooth. See Bluetooth connection , p. âÂÂ87â . - USB connection is active. R0915_en.book Pag e 15 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 16 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Clock Options in Clock: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Press and select Clock . ⢠To set a ne w alarm, select Option s â Set alarm . Enter the alarm time, and press OK . When the alarm is active, the indicator is shown. ⢠To turn off the alarm, press Stop . When the alarm tone sounds, press any key or Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume. You can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached whi le the device is switched off, the device switch es itself on and starts soun ding the alarm ton e. If you press Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Press No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not press Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. ⢠To cancel an alarm, select Cloc k â Options â Remove alarm . Clock settings ⢠To chang e the clo ck sett ings, se lect Options â Setting s in Clock. ⢠To change the cl ock shown in the st andby mode, scroll down and select Clock t ype â Analogue or Digital . ⢠To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zo ne information to your phone (network service), scroll down and select Auto time update . For the Auto time update setting to take effect, the phone restarts. ⢠To change the alarm tone, scroll down and select Clock ala rm tone . ⢠To change the daylight saving time status, scroll down and select Daylight-sav ing . Select On to add one hour to the My home city time. See My home city , p. âÂÂ17â . When the Daylight-saving is active, the indicator is shown in the Clock main view. R0915_en.book Pag e 16 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 17 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. World clock Open Clock and press to open the World clock vi ew. In the World clock view you can view the time in different cities. ⢠To add cities to the list, select Options â Add city . Enter the first letters of the city name. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a city. You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. ⢠To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options â My home city . The city is displayed in the Clock main view and the ti me in your phone is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume control and built-in loudspeaker ⢠To increase or decrease the volume level, wh en you ha ve an active call or ar e listening to a sound, pres s or , respecti vely. The built-in loudspeaker al lows you to speak an d listen to the phone from a short distance without having to hold th e phone to your ea r, for example, hav ing it on a table nearby . Sound applications use th e loudspeaker by default. ⢠To locate the loudspeaker, see the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂKeys and partsâÂÂ. ⢠To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and press . Important: Do not hold the phone near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. ⢠To turn off the loudspea ker, when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press . File manager - managing memory Many features of the phone use memory to store data. Th ese featur es include contacts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded Fig. 2 Navigation bar shows the speaker in use: Handset or Loudsp. . R0915_en.book Pag e 17 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 18 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. applications. The free memory available depends on how muc h data is already saved in t he phone memory. You can use a memory ca rd as extra sto rage spac e. Memo ry cards ar e re-writable, so you can delete an d save data on a memory card. ⢠To browse files and folders in the phone memory or on a memo ry card (if inse rted), press and select Organiser â File mgr. . The phone memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). ⢠To move or copy files to a folder, press and at th e same time to mark a file , and select Option s â Move to folder or Copy to folder . Icons in File manager: - folder, - folder that has a subfolder. ⢠To find a file, se lect Options â Find , select the memory from which to search, and enter a search text that ma tches the file name. Viewing memory consumption ⢠To view what types of data you have in the phone and how much memory the different data types consume, select Opt ions â Memory details . Sc roll down to Free memory to view the amount of free memory in the phone. ⢠To view the amount of free memory on the memory card, if you have a card inser t ed in the phone, press to open the memory card view, and select Options â Memory details . See Fig. 3, p. âÂÂ19â . Tip! You can use Nokia Phone Browser available in Noki a PC Suite to view the different memories in your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Memory low - freeing memory The phone notifies you if the phone memory or memory card memory is getting low. ⢠To free phone memory, tra nsfer data to a memory card in the File manager. Mark files to be moved, and select Move to fo lder , select memory card, and a folder. ⢠To remove data to free memory, use the File manager application, or go to the respective ap plication. For example, you can remove: ⢠messages from the In box, Drafts, and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠retrieved e-mail messages from th e phone memory ⢠saved Web pages R0915_en.book Pag e 18 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 19 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠contact information â¢c a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠downloaded applications, see also Application manager , p. âÂÂ107â . ⢠any other data that you no longer need. Memory card tool Note: This device uses Reduced Size Dual Vo ltage (1.8/3V) MultiMediaCard (MMC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage MMCs. Check the compatibility of an MMC with its manufacturer or provider. Press and select Organiser â Memory . You can use a memory card as ex tra storage space. See Quick Start Guide, âÂÂInserting the memory cardâÂÂ. You can also back up information from phone memory and rest ore the information to the phone later. You cannot use the memory card if the d oor of the memory card slot is open. Options in Memory card: Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Memory details , Help , and Exit . Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Do not open the memory card slot door in th e middle of an operation. Opening the slot door may damage the memory card as well as the de vice, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. Use only compatible Multimedia cards (MMC) with this device. Ot her memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompat ible memory ca rd may damage the memory car d as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. ⢠To backup information from phone memory to a memory card, select Options â Backup phone mem. . ⢠To restore information from the memory card to the phone memory, select Options â Restore from card . Fig. 3 Memory consumption of the memory c ard. R0915_en.book Pag e 19 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 20 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Formatting a memory card When a memory card is formatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Tip! To rename a memory card, go to Memory card and select Options â Memory card name. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted an d others requ ire formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card befo re you can use it. To format a memory card, select Options â Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When formatting is complete, ente r a name for the memory ca rd, and press OK . R0915_en.book Pag e 20 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 21 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Making calls Making a voice call Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press or . 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, press twice for the character (repla ces the international access code), and enter the coun try code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Pres s to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press and select Tools â Voice mail and select Options â Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider) and press OK . Pressing will always end a call, even if another application is active. Making a call from the Contacts application - Pres s and sele ct Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter th e first letters of the name to the Sea rch field. Matchi ng contacts are listed. Press to call. Select the call type Voic e call. Calling your voice mailbox (network servi ce) - To call your voice mailbox, press and hold in the standby mode. See also Call diverting , p. âÂÂ104â . Calling a recently dialled numb er - In the standby mode, pres s to access a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to ca ll. Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the numb er. Making a video call When you make a video call, you can see a re al-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. See Figure 4. The video image captured by the camera in your phone will be shown to the video call recipient. R0915_en.book Pag e 21 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 22 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! With Nokia Video Call Stand PT-8, you can view your own image and the other callerâÂÂs image from your phon e display during a video call. To be ab le t o m ak e a vi d eo ca ll , y ou ne e d t o h av e a US I M c ar d a n d b e in t he co ve ra g e o f a UMTS network. For availability of and subscr iption to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible m obile phone or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made w hile there is anot her voice, video, or data call active. 1 To start a video call, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or go to Contacts, and select a contact. Then select Options â Call â Video call . 2 Starting a video call may take a while. A note Wai ting for image is shown. If the call is not successful, for example, vi deo calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible, you w i l l b e a sk e d if y o u w a n t to t r y a n o rm a l call or send a message instead. 3 The video call is active when you can see tw o video images and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you may see a still image or no image at all. You will hear the sound. Icons: - the vi deo call recipient has denied v ideo sending from his device. - you have denied video sen ding from your phone. Select Enable / Disable : Sending video , Se nding audio or Sending audio & video if you want to change between showing video or hearing only sound. Select Zoom in or Zoom out ; or press and to zoom your own image. Zoom indicator is shown on the top of the display. 4 To end the video call, press . Note: Even if you have denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video call. Check the pric ing wi th your network op erator or service provider. Tip! To speed dial a number by pressing and holding the key, press and select Tools â Settings â Call and set Speed dialling â On . Speed dialling a phone number ⢠To assign a phone number to one of th e speed dialling keys ( - ), press and select Tools â Speed dial . is reserved for the voice mailbox. ⢠To call: In standby mode, press the speed dial key an d . Fig. 4 Making a video call. R0915_en.book Pag e 22 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 23 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Making a conference call (network service) 1 Make a call to the fir st particip ant. 2 To make a call to anothe r participant, select Options â New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, join the first participant in the conf erence call. Select Options â Conference . ⢠To add a n ew person t o the call, repeat step 2, and select Optio ns â Conference â Add to conference . The phone supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. ⢠To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options â Conferen ce â Private . Select a participant and press Private . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. The ot her part icipants can still continue the conference call. Once you have finished the private conversation, select Options â Add to conference to return to the conference call. ⢠To drop a participant, select Options â Conference â Drop participant , sc roll to the participant, and press Drop . 4 To end the active confer ence call, press . Answering or rejecting a call ⢠To answer the call, press . ⢠To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, press Silenc e . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a ca ll by pressing the headset key. ⢠If you do not want to answer a call, press to reject it. The caller will hear a line busy tone. If you have activated the Call divert â If busy function to divert cal ls, rejecting an incoming call will also dive rt the call. See Call diverting , p. âÂÂ104â . When you reject an incoming call, you ca n also send a t ext message to the caller informing why you could not answer the call. Select Options â Send text message . You can edit the text before sending it. See also Reject call with SMS , p. âÂÂ9 6â . R0915_en.book Pag e 23 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 24 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Answering or rejecting a video call When a video call arrives, you can see the icon . 1 Press to answer the vid eo call. Allow video image to be sent to call er? is show n. If you select Yes , the image being captured by the ca mera in your phone is shown to the caller. If you sele ct No , video s ending is not activated, and a still image or no image is shown. You will hear the sound. See Tools , Image in video call , p. âÂÂ97â . 2 To end the video call, press . Call waiting (network service) You can answer a call while you have another ca ll in progress if you ha ve activated the Call waiting function in Tools â Settings â Cal l â Call waitin g (see also p. âÂÂ24â ). Tip! To change the phone tones for different environments and events, for example, when you want your phone to be silent, see Profiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . ⢠To answer the waiting call, press . The firs t call is put on hold. ⢠To switch between the two calls, press Swap . Select Options â Transfer to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an acti ve call and to discon nect yourself from the calls. To end the active call, pr ess . To end both calls, select Option s â End all calls . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use du ring a call are network services. Press Options during a call for some of t he following options: Mute or Unmute , Answer , Reject, Swap, Hold or Unhol d , Activate handset , Activate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree ( if a compatible Bluetooth headset is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conferen ce , and Transfer . Select: Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact car d. ⢠Replace - to end a n active call and replac e it by ans wering the waiting call. ⢠Send MMS (in UMTS networks only) - to send an image or a video in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call . You ca n edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press to send the file to a compatible device (network service). R0915_en.book Pag e 24 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 25 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Send DTMF - to send DTMF tone strings, for example, a pass word. Enter the D TMF string or search for it in Cont acts. To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Press OK to send the tone. Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, press and select Log â Recent calls . The phone registers missed and re ceived calls only if the network supports these functions, the phone is switched on, and within the networkâÂÂs service area. Tip! When you see a note in standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . Erasing recent call lists - To clear all recent call lis ts, select Options â Clear recent calls in the Recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and select Options â Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press and select Log â Call duration. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service prov ider may vary, depending on network features, round ing off for billing, and so forth. Clearing call duration timers - Sele ct Options â Clear timers . For this you need the lock code, see Security , Phone and SIM , p. âÂÂ101â . R0915_en.book Pag e 25 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 26 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press and select Log â Packet data . For example, you may be char ged for your pac ket data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Icons: - incoming, - outgoing, and - missed communication events. Monitoring all communication events To monitor all voice and video calls, text mess ages, or data connections registered by the phone, press and select Log , and press to open the general log. See Fig. 5. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filt er the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact card s based on the log information. Tip! To vi ew a li st of sent messages, press and select Messagin g â Sent . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as on e communication event. Conn ections to yo ur mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or Web page s are shown as packet data connections. Note: When sending messages, y our phone may display the word â Se nt âÂÂ. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message centre number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destinat ion. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. ⢠To filter the log, select Options â Filter . Scroll to a filter and press Select . ⢠To erase the contents of the log, Recent ca lls register, and Messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options â Clear log . Press Yes to confirm. â¢T o s e t t h e Log duration , go to Options â Settings â Log duration . The log events remain in the phone memory for a set number of days after wh ich they are automatically erased to fr ee memory. If you select No log , all the log cont ents, Recent calls register, and Messaging deliver y reports are permanently deleted. Fig. 5 General log of communication events. R0915_en.book Pag e 26 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 27 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Packet data counter and connection tim er : To view how much data, measured in kilobytes, has been transferred and how long a c ertain packet data connection has las ted, scroll to an inc oming or outgoing event indic ated by Pack. , and select Opti ons â View details . R0915_en.book Pag e 27 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 28 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) Options in the Contacts dir ectory: Open , Call , Create message , New contact , Open conver sation , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group (shown if you have created a group), Belongs to groups (shown if you have created a group), Mark/Unmark, Copy , SIM contacts , Go to web address , Send, Contacts info , Settings, Help , and Exit . Press and select Contacts . In C ontacts you can add a personal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnail im age to a contac t card. You ca n also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. You can add received contact information (business cards) to Co ntacts. See Receiving logos, to nes, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compat ible devices. Saving names and numbers 1 Select Options â New contact. 2 Fill in the fields th at you want, and pre ss Done . ⢠To edit contact cards i n Contacts, scroll to the contac t card you want to edit, and select Options â Edit . ⢠To delete a contact card in Contacts, sele ct a card, and press . To delete several contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Options when editing a contact card: Add thumbnail , Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . ⢠To attach a small thum bnail image to a contact card, op en the contact card and select Options â Edit . Then select Options â Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Using default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact into a certain number or address. 1 In Contacts, select a contact, and press . R0915_en.book Pag e 28 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 29 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! You can add and edit contact cards using Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplie d in the sales package. 2 Select Opti ons â Defaults . 3 Select a de fault to which you want to add a number or an address, and press Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you wa nt to set as a defaul t, and press Select . The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory Tip! To send contact information, select the card you want to send. Select Options â Send â Via text message , Via multimedia or Via Blueto oth . See the Messaging chapter, and Sending data using Bluetooth , p. âÂÂ88â . ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SIM ca rd to your phone, press and select Contacts â Options â SIM contacts â SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy, and select Options â Copy to Contacts . ⢠To copy a telephone, fax, or pager number from Contacts to your SIM card, select Contacts, and open a contact card. Scroll to the number, and select Options â Copy to SIM direct. . SIM directory and other SIM services Note: For availability, rates, and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor (network operator, service provider or other vendor). Press and select Contacts â Options â SIM contacts â SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to Contacts, and you can make calls. Adding ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, th e phone plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognises it). R0915_en.book Pag e 29 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 30 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dialling keys to eight phone numbers. See âÂÂSpeed dialling a phone numberâ , p.âÂÂ22â . 1 Press to open a contact card or go to th e Groups list and select a contact group. 2 Select Options â Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Voice dialling You can make a ph one call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken words can be a voice tag. Tip! You can synchronis e your cont acts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Before using voice tags , note that: ⢠Voice tags are not language-dependent. Th ey are dependent on the speaker 's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. R e c o r d v o i c e t a g s a n d use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. Example: You can use a personâÂÂs name as a voice tag (for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs mobileâÂÂ. Adding a voice tag to a phone number You can have only one voice tag per contact ca rd. You can add a voice tag to up to 50 phone numbers. 1 In Contacts, open the contact card to which you want t o add a voice tag. Tip! To vi ew a li st of voice tags you have defined, select Options â Contacts info â Voice tags in Contacts. 2 Scroll to the number to which you wa nt to add the voice tag and select Options â Add voice tag . 3 Press Start to record a voice tag. After the starti ng tone, say clearly the words you want to record as a voice tag. Wait until the phone plays the recorded tag and saves it. A R0915_en.book Pag e 30 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 31 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. symbol can be seen next to the number in the contact card ind icating t hat a voice tag has been added to it. Tip! To listen to, change, or delete a voice tag, open a contac t card and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indicated by ). Select Options â Voice tag . Then select either Playback , Change , or Delete . Making a call by saying a voice tag You must say the voice tag exactly as you sa id it when you recorded it. When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudsp eaker is in use. Hold the phone at a short distance away and say the voice tag clearly. ⢠Press and hold . A short tone is played and the note Speak now is displayed. The phone plays the original voic e tag, displays the name and number, and dials the number of the recognised voice tag. Creating contact groups 1 In Contacts, press to open the Groups list. 2 Select Options â New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group %N and press OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options â Add members . Options in the Groups list view: Open , New group , Delete , Re name , Ringin g tone , Contacts info , Settings , Help , and Exit . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Press OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options â Rename . Then enter the ne w name, and press OK . Removing members from a group 1 In the Groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options â Remove from group . 3 Press Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, s croll to the contact, and select Options â Belongs to groups . R0915_en.book Pag e 31 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 32 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery Camera Shortcut: Press in the standby mode to open Camera. With the Camera application you can take pictures an d record videos while on the move. The images and video are automatically save d in the Gallery application. The camera produces JPEG images, and video clips are reco rded in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension. You can also send images or a video in a multimedia message, as an e-m ail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection . Tip! You can insert an image into a contact card. See Saving names and numbers , p. âÂÂ28â . The Nokia 6630 device supports an image captur e resolution of up to 1280 x 960 pixels. The image resolution in these mater ials may appear different. Taking pictures Options before taking a picture: Capture , New , Activate night mode / Deact. night mode , Sequence mode / Norm al mode , Self-timer , Go to Gallery , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 Press in the standby mode. The Camera application opens, and you can see the view to be captured. See Figure. Press or to move between Image and Video views. 1. Indicator shows where the im ages will be saved: to phone memory ( ) or memory card ( ). 2. Shows an approximate es timate of how many images, depending on the selected image quality, fit in the memory of your phone or the memory card. See Image quality , p. âÂÂ34â . 3. The zoom indicator show s the zoom level. Press to zoom in, press to zoom out. 4. Night mode active indicator . 5. The sequence mode indicator . See p. âÂÂ34â . R0915_en.book Pag e 32 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 33 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 6. The self-timer ind icator sh ows how much time is left before a pictu re is taken. See p. âÂÂ34â . Shortcuts: Press to activate or deactivate Night mode. Press to activate or deactivate Sequence mode. Press to adjust brightness. Press to adjust contrast. 2 To take a picture, press . Do not move the phone before the Camera application starts to save the image. The im age is saved automatically in the Images folder of Gallery. See Gallery , p. âÂÂ36â . Saving the captured image may take longer if you have changed the zoom, brightness, or contrast settings. See Taking pictures , p. âÂÂ32â for zoom level, and When taking a picture , p. âÂÂ33â for adjusting brightness and contrast. When taking a picture: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take images or record video in a dark environment, use the Night mode. I f you are using the Night mode, the exposure time is lo nger and the camera needs to be kept still longer. ⢠To adjust brightness or contrast before taking a picture, select Options â Adjust â Brightness or Contrast . ⢠The resolution of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture, but the image remains the same size. Y ou may notice the difference in image quality if viewed on a PC, for example. ⢠Camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no key presses within a minute. To continue taking pictures, press . After the i mage has been take n: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, p ress . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . ⢠To send the image Via multimedia , via e-mail , or via Bluetooth , press . For more information see the Messaging chapter, p. âÂÂ45â and Bluetooth conn ection , p . âÂÂ87â . ⢠To set the picture as wallpaper in the standby mode, select Options â Set as wallpaper . Fig. 6 Pictures taken in a sequence. R0915_en.book Pag e 33 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 34 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Taking pictures in a sequence Select Options â Sequence mode to set the camera to take 6 pictures in a sequence. After the pictures have been taken, they are auto matically saved in the Gallery, and they are shown in a grid. See Fig. 6. You in the picture - self-timer Use the self-timer to delay the taking of a pi cture so that you can in cl ude yourself in the picture. Select the self-timer delay: Options â S elf-timer â 1 0 seconds , 20 se conds , or 30 seconds . Press Activate . You can see the self-timer indicator ( ) blink and hear a beep when the timer is running. The camera will ta ke the picture after the selected delay has elapsed. Adjusting camera settings 1 Select Options â Settingsâ Image. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change: Glossary: Resolution is a measure of sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolution refers to the number of pixels in an image. The more pixels, the more detailed the picture is, and the more memory it consumes. ⢠Image quality - High , Normal , and Basic . The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. The resolution of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture, but the image re mains the same size. You may notice the difference in image quality if viewed on a PC, for example. If you are going to print the image, select High or Normal image quality. ⢠Show captured image - Select Yes if you want to see the ca ptured image after it has been taken or No if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. ⢠Image resolution - Select the resolution you want to use for the images you are going to take. ⢠Default image name - Set a default name for the ima ges you are going to take. You can replace date with your own text (for example, âÂÂHoliday_2004âÂÂ). ⢠Memory in use - Select where to store your images. R0915_en.book Pag e 34 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 35 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Recording videos 1 Press Camera in the standby mode. 2 Press or to move between Image and Video views. Open the Video view. An indicator shows where the video will be save d: to phone memory ( ) or memory card () . 3 Press to sta rt recording. The record icon is shown. Options before recording a video: Record , New , Activate nigh t mode / Deact. night mode , Mute / Unmute , Go to Gallery , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1. The elapsed time / time left with the current video length setting. 2. The zoom indicator shows the zoom level. Press to zoom i n on your subject before or during recording. Press to zoom out. 3. Microphone muted indicator . 4. Night mode active indicator . To pause recording at any time, press . The pause icon starts to blink on the display. Press again to resume reco rding. Shortcuts: Press to activate or deactivate Night mode. Press to adjust brightness. Press to adjust contrast. Video recording is automatically stopped if re cording is set to pause and there are no key presses within a minute. 4 Press Stop to stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved to the Video clips folder of the Gallery. See Galle ry , p. âÂÂ36â . After a video clip has been recorded: ⢠To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, select Option s â Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to record a new video, press . ⢠To send the video Via multimedia , via e-mail , or via Bluetooth , press . For more information see the Messaging chapter, p. âÂÂ45â and Bluetooth conn ection , p . âÂÂ87â . R0915_en.book Pag e 35 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 36 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Adjusting video recorder settings Select Options â Settingsâ Video and the setting you want to change: ⢠Length - If you select Maximum , the length of the video recording is restricted to one hour per clip. Select Short to record video clips up to 300 kB, which is approximately 30 seconds in duration, so that they can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some network s, however, may only support sending of multimedia messages with the maximum size of 1 00 kB. ⢠Video resolutio n , Default video name and Memory in use . Gallery Tip! You can transfer music files from a computer to your MMC card using Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Press and select Gallery . In the Gallery application you can store and organise your images, sound clips, playlists, video c lips, streaming links, and .ram files. Select Images , Video clips , Tracks , Sound clips , Links , or All files , and press to open it. You can browse, open, and create folders; an d mar k, copy and move items to fol ders. Sound clips, video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See RealPlayer⢠, p. âÂÂ4 1â . Tip! To leave the application open and music playing in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press and select Gallery . ⢠Press to open a file or a folder. Images are opene d in the Image viewer. See Viewing images , p. âÂÂ37â . ⢠To copy or move files to the memory card or to phone memory, select a file and Options â Organ ise â Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem . . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . ⢠To download files into the Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downls. , Video downlds. , Track downlds. , or Sound downlds. . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark for the site to download from. R0915_en.book Pag e 36 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 37 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! You can transfer images from your phone to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. ⢠To search for a file, select Optio ns â Find . Start to enter a search string (for example, the name or date of the file you are search ing). Files that match your sear ch are shown. Viewing images Pictures taken with the Camera applicat ion are stored in th e Gallery. Images can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluetooth. To be able to view a received image in Gallery, you need to save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Open the Images folder in the Gallery to start the image viewer, select an image, and press to view it. Options when viewing an image: Send , Set as wallpaper , Rotate , Zoom in / Zoom out , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View details , Add to 'Go to' , Help , and Exit . ⢠To zoom an image, select Options â Zoom in (or press ) or Zoom out (or press ). You can see the zooming ratio at th e top of the display. Press and hold to return to the normal view. The z ooming ratio is not stored permanently. ⢠To see more of the image, select Options â Full screen (or press ). The panes around the image are removed. T o move the focus when you are zooming an image, use the scroll key. ⢠To rotate the image, select Options â Rotate (or press to rotate anticlockwise and to rotate clockwise). R0915_en.book Pag e 37 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 38 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Media Video editor To create custom video clips, press and select Media â Vid. editor . You can create custom video clips by combining and trimmi ng video clips, and adding sound clips, transitions, and effects. Trans itions are visu al effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. Editing video, sound, and transitions 1 Mark and select one or more video clips. 2 Select Options â Edit . In the Edit video view, you ca n insert video clips to make a custom video clip, and edit the clips by trimming and adding effects. You can add sound clips and change their duration. To modify the vid eo, select one of the following op tions: Preview - Previews the custom video clip. Cut - Trims the video clip or a sound clip in th e Cut video clip or in the Cut sound clip view. Insert : ⢠Video clip - Inserts the selected video clip. A thumbnai l of the video clip is shown in the Main view. A thumbnail consists of th e first non-black view of the video clip. The name and length of the sele cted video clip is also shown. ⢠Sound clip - Inserts the selected sound clip. Th e name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the Main view. ⢠New sound clip - Records a new sound clip to the selected location. Fig. 7 The Edit video view, where the selected transition is set to Dip to black . R0915_en.book Pag e 38 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 39 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options â Take snapshot in the Play view, Edit Preview view or in the Cut view. Edit video c lip : ⢠Move - Moves the video clip to the selected location. ⢠Add colour effect - Inserts a colour effect on the video clip. ⢠Use slow motion - Slows the speed of the video clip. ⢠Mute sound / Unmute so und - Mutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. ⢠Remove - Removes the video clip from the video. ⢠Duplicate - Makes a copy of the selected video clip or sound clip. ⢠Edit sound cli p : ⢠Move - Moves the sound clip to th e selected location. ⢠Set duration - Edits the sound clip length. ⢠Remove - Removes the sound clip from the video. ⢠Duplicate - Makes a copy of the selected video clip or sound clip. ⢠Edit transition - There are three types of transition s: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clips. A start tra nsition can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. 3 Select Save to save your video. You can define the Memory in use in the Settings . The default is the phone memory. Tip! In the Settings view you can define the Default video name , Default sc. shot name and the Memory in use . Select Send : Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth if you want to send the video. Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, a symbol will appear. Tip! I f yo u w an t t o s e n d a v i de o cl i p t ha t i s o v er t h e ma x im u m m ul t i me d i a m e s s ag e size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth. Sending data using Bluetooth , p. âÂÂ88â . You can also transfer your vi deos using Bluetooth into your Bluetooth-enabled personal computer, or by using a memory card reader (internal/ external ). R0915_en.book Pag e 39 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 40 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Movie director To create muvees, pr ess and select Media â Mo vie . muvees are short, edited video clips that can contain video, music and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by the Movie director after you have selected the st yle for the muvee. Movie director uses the default music and text associated with the chos en style. Every style has, for example, its own font style, colour, mus ic, and pace. To Custom muvee you can select yo ur own video and music clips, images and style, and you ca n also ad d an opening and closing message. muvees can be sent using MMS. Open Movie , and press or to move between the and views. You can also return to th e main view from the view by pressing Done . The view cont ains a list of video clips that you can Play , Send, Re name , and Delete . Tip! To download new styles to your phone, select Style downlds. from the Movie director main view. ⢠To creat e a quick muvee, select Quick muvee , and press . Select a style for the muvee from the style list, and press . The created muvee will be s aved in the Movie director muvee list. The muvee will be played automatically after savi ng. ⢠To create a custom muvee, select Cu stom muvee . In Video , Image , Style , or Music , select the clips you want to include in your muvee. In Message you can add an opening text and a closing text to a muvee. Select Crea te muvee .: ⢠Multimedia message - the length of the muvee is optimised for MMS sending. ⢠Same as music - to set the muvee duration to be the same as the music clip chosen. Options in the muvee list options menu: Play , Send , Rename , Delete , Help and Exit . ⢠User defined - to define the length of the muvee. Select Options â Sav e . ⢠To preview the custom muvee before saving it, in Preview muvee view, select Options â Play . ⢠To create a new custom muvee by using the same style set tings, select Options â Recreate . R0915_en.book Pag e 40 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 41 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠To add an opening text and a closing text to a custom muvee when you are creating it, in Create muvee view selec t Message . Enter the opening message and the closing message, and select Done . Settings Select Settings to edit the following options: ⢠Memory in use - Select where to store your muvees. ⢠Resolution - Select the resolution of your muvees. ⢠Default muve e name - Set a default nam e for the muvees . Image mgr. To browse your images visually, press and select Media â Image mgr . See Fig. 8. 1 Press to select the memory: Phone or Memory card . Image manager also shows how many folders or images are in the selected folder. 2 Open a folder to browse your images visually. Press and to move between images and folders. Press to view an image. ⢠Press and simultaneously to mark im ages for an image show. A check mark is shown next to a selected image. Select Options â Image show . Press and to view the next or previous image in the show. Options in RealPlayer when a clip is selected: Play , Play in full screen / Continue , Continue in full sc r. ; Stop , M ute / Unmute , Clip details , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Recorder Press and select Media â Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conv ersation, both parties w ill hear a tone every five seconds during recording. RealPlayer⢠Press and select Media â RealPlayer . With RealPlayer⢠you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists, or stream media files over the air. A streaming link can be Fig. 8 Images viewed in Image manager. R0915_en.book Pag e 41 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 42 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. activated when you are browsing Web pages, or it can be stored in the phone memory or memory card. RealPlayer supports files with the extensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3 and .wav.However, RealPlayer does not necessarily su pport all file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer will a ttempt to open all .mp4 files, but some .mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this pho ne. Playing video or sound clips 1 To play a media file stored in phone memory or memory card, select Options â Open and select: Icons: - Repeat, - Random, - Repeat and random, - Loudspeaker muted ⢠Most recent clips - To play one of the last si x files played in RealPlayer, ⢠Saved clip - To play a file saved in the Gallery. See Gallery , p. âÂÂ36â , ⢠Mem. card sound clip s - To play a file saved in the memory card. 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mo de, press . Press again to change back to normal scre en mode. Streaming content over the air Tip! To leave the application open and music playing in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press and select RealPlayer . To stream live content, you must first conf igure your default access point. See Data connections and access points , p. âÂÂ97â . Many service providers require you to use an Internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. Contact your service provider for more information. Note: In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp :// URL address. However, Browser is able to open an http link to a .r am file, and pass it to RealPlayer. R0915_en.book Pag e 42 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 43 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Shortcuts during play: To fast forward, press and hold . To rewind through the media file, press and hold . To mute the sound, press and hold until the indicator is displayed. To turn on the sound, press and hold until you see the indicator. To stream content over the air , select a stre aming link saved in the Gallery, on a Web page, or received in a text message or multim edia message. Before live content begins streaming, your phone will connect to the site and start loading the content. Receiving RealPlayer settings You may receive RealP layer settings in a spec ial text message from the network operator or service provider. See Receiving logos, tone s, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Changing the RealPlayer setting s Select Options â Settings : Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers use them to provide additional security or spee d up access to browser pages that contain sound or video clips. Video - To have RealPlayer automatically repe at video clips after they finish playing. Audio settings - To select i f you want to repeat playing of trac k lists and play sound clips on a track list in random o rder. Connection settings - To select whether to use a pr oxy server, change the default access point, and set the time-outs and port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. ⢠Proxy settings: ⢠Use proxy - To use a proxy server, select Yes . ⢠Proxy serv. address - Enter the IP address of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number - Enter the port number of the proxy server. ⢠Network settings: ⢠Default access point - Scroll to the access point you want to use to connect to the Internet, and press . ⢠Online time - Set the time for RealPlayer to di sconnect from the network when you have paused a media clip playing through a network link, select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and press OK . R0915_en.book Pag e 43 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 44 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Connection time-out - Press or to set the maximum time to elapse between selecting a network link and conne cting to the media server, and press OK . ⢠Server time-out - Press or to set the maximum time to wait for a respo nse from the media server before disconnecting, and press OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port - Enter the lowest port number of the server's port range. T he minimum value is 6970. ⢠Highest UDP por t - Enter the highest port number of the server' s port range. Th e maximum value is 32000. Select Options â Advanced settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networks. R0915_en.book Pag e 44 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 45 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Messaging Options in the Messaging main view: Open , Create message , Connec t (shown if you have defined mailbox settings) / Disconnect (shown if a connection to mailbox is active), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings , Help , and Exit . Press and select Messaging . In Messaging, you can create, send, receiv e, view, edit, and organise text messages, mult imedia messages, e-mail messag es, and special text messages containing data. You can also receive messages and data through Bluetooth, receive Web service messages, cell broadcast messages as well as send service commands. Note: These functions can only be used if they are supported by your network operator or service pro vider. Only devi ces that offer compatible mul timedia message, or e-mail features can receive and display these messages. Some networks might provide the recipient device with a Web page link to view multimedia messages. When you open Messaging, you can see the Ne w message function and a list of folders: Inbox - contains received messages excep t e-mail and c ell broadcast messages. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . Tip! Organise your messages by adding new folders under My folders . My folders - for organising your messages into folders. Mailbox - In Ma il bo x y o u c an c on ne ct to y ou r r em ot e ma il bo x to re tr ie v e y ou r n e w e-mail messages or view your previously retr ieved e-mail messages offline. See Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, you ca n switch between the folders by pressing or . Drafts - stores draft messages that have not been sent. Sent - stores the last 15 messages that ha ve been sent excluding messages sent using Bluetooth. To change the number of messages to be saved, see Other setti ngs , p. âÂÂ62â . Outbox - is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to b e sent. Reports - You can request the networ k to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messa ges you have se nt (network service) . Receiving a delivery R0915_en.book Pag e 45 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 46 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. report of a multimedia message that has be en sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. ⢠To enter and send service requests (also kn own as USSD comman ds), such as activa tion commands for network services, to your servic e provider, select Messaging â Options â Service command in the main view of Messaging. Options in Cell broadcast: Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Remove hotmark , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠Cell broadcast is a network service that a llows you to receive messages on various topics, suc h as weather or t raffic co nditions from your se rvice provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, cont act yo ur service provider. In the main view of Messaging, select Options â Cell broa dcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Cell broadcast messages cannot be receiv ed in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Writing text Traditional text input Icons: and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the word, is written in upper case, and all the other letters will automatically be written in lower case. indicates number mode. The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( - ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more ch aracters availa ble for a number key than are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and ho ld to clear more than one character. ⢠The most common punctuation mar ks are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. R0915_en.book Pag e 46 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 47 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Press to open a list of sp ecial charac ters. Use to mov e through the l ist, and press Select to select a character. ⢠To insert a space, pres s . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . Predictive text input - Dictionary You can enter any letter with a single keypre ss. The predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This will activate predictive text input for all editors in th e phone. The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are wr iting text using predictive text input. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys - . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a . See the Fig. 9. The word suggestion changes after each key press. 3 When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, confirm it by pressing or add a space by p ressing . ⢠If the word is not correct, press repe atedly to view th e matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Or, press and select Dictionary â Matches . ⢠If the ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, press Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and press OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes fu ll, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Fig. 9 The word match is evolving, wai t until you have keyed in t he whole word before you check the results. R0915_en.book Pag e 47 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 48 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tips on using predictive text input ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and ho ld to clear more than one character. ⢠To change between th e different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . If you press quickly twice, the pred ictive text input is turned off. Tip! The predictive text input will try to guess whic h commonl y used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the dictionary. ⢠To insert a number in letter mo de, pr ess and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠The most common punctuation marks are availa ble under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the d esired punct uation ma rk. ⢠Press and hold to open a list of special characters. ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. â¢P r e s s , s e l e c t Dictionary , and press to select one of the following options: Matches to view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert w ord to add a word (up to 32 letters) to th e dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. Edit word to edit the word using traditional text input. This is availa ble if the word is active (underlined). Tip! When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), C opy (if text has been selected), Paste (when text has been cut or copied first), Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writing language: (changes the input language for all editors in the phone). Writing compound word s Write the first half of a compound word; to co nfirm it, press . Write the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turning predictive text input off Press , and select Dictionary â Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 48 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 49 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Copying text to clipboard 1 To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same ti me, press or . As the selection mov es, text is hi ghlighted. 2 To copy the text to clipboard, while s till holding , press Copy . 3 To in sert the text into a docum ent, press and hold , and press Paste . Or, press once, and select Paste . ⢠To select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . ⢠To remove the selected text from the document, press . Writing and se nding messages The appearance of a multimed ia message may vary depending on the receiving device. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred, or forwarded. Tip! You can start to create a message from any application that has the option Send . Select a file (an image, text) to be added t o the messag e, and select Optio ns â Send . Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See Receiving MMS and e-mail settings , p. âÂÂ51â and Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . 1 Select New me ssage . A list of message options opens. ⢠Text message - to send a text message. ⢠Multimedia message - to send a multimedia message (MMS). ⢠E-mail - to send an e-mail. If you have not s et up your e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 2 Press to select recipients or groups fro m Contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Pr ess to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the Clipboard. 3 Press to move to the message field. R0915_en.book Pag e 49 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 50 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Attachments (e-mai l), Preview (MMS), Obj ects (MMS), Remove ( MMS), Delete , Check contacts , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exit . 4 Write the message. Note: Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the normal 160-character limit. If your message exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent as a series of two or more messages an d sending may cost you more. In the navigation bar, you can see the messag e length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 charac ters for the text to be sent as two messages. Some character s may take more sp ace than others. ⢠To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options â Insert object â Image , Sound clip or Video clip . Whe n sound is added, the icon is shown in the naviga tion bar. Tip! When you send a multimedia message to an e-mail address or a device that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you are not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support sending large file, it is recommended that you use a s maller image size or a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options â Settings â Multim edia message â Image size in the Messaging main view. If you select Insert new â Sound clip , Recorder o pens, and you can record a new sound. Press Select , the new sound is automatically sa ved, and a copy is inserted in the messag e. Select Options â Preview to see what the multimedia message looks like. ⢠To add an attach ment to an e-mail, select Options â Insert â Image , Sound clip, Video clip , Note , or Template . E-mail attachments are indicated by in the naviga tion bar. 5 To send the message, select Options â Send , or press . Note: E-mail messages are au tomatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in th e Outbox with th e status Failed . Tip! In Messaging you can also create presen tations and send them in a multimedia message. In Multimedia mess age editor view, select Options â Create presen tation (shown Fig. 10 Creating a multimedia message. R0915_en.book Pag e 50 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 51 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ). See Settings for multimedia messages , p. âÂÂ58â . Receiving MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message fr om your network operator or service provider. See Receiving logos, tones, busine ss cards, calendar ent ries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . Tip! To send files other than sounds and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Send â Via e-mail , if available. For availability of and subscription to dat a services, please contact your network operator or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your service provider. Entering the MMS se ttings manually: 1 Select Tools â Sett ings â Connection â Access points and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point. See Connectio n settings , p. âÂÂ97â . 2 Select Me ssaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message . Open Access point in use and select the access point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See also Settings for multimedia messages , p. âÂÂ5 8â . Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (I AP) correctly. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . Inbox icons: - unread messages in Inbox, - unread text message, - unread multimedia message, and - data received through Bluetooth. ⢠Define your e-mail settings co rrectly. See Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instru ctions giv en by your remote mailbox and Internet service provider (ISP). Inbox - receiving messages When you receive a message, and the text 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. Press Show to open the message. To open a messag e in Inbox, scroll to it and press . R0915_en.book Pag e 51 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 52 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving multimedia messages Important: Multimedia message objec ts may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message, and simultaneously listen to a sound through the loudspeaker ( is shown if sound is included). Click the arrow in the icon to listen to the sound. To see what kinds of media objects have b een included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options â Objects . You can choose to save a multimedia object file in your phone or send it, for example, th rough Bluetooth to another compatible device. You may also receive multimedia presentati ons. You can view th ese presentations by selecting Options â Play presentation . Copyright protections may prevent some imag es, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred, or forwarded. Receiving logos, tones, busine ss cards, calendar entries, and settings Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to Contacts. Your phone can receive many kin d s of text me ssages th at contain data ( ), also called Over-The -Air (OTA) mes sages. ⢠Configuration message - You may receive a text message service number, voice mailbox number, Internet access point settings, acce ss point login script settings, or e-mail settings from your network operator, service provider, or company information management department in a configuration me ssage. To save the settings, select Options â Save all . ⢠Business card - To save the information to Conta cts, select Options â Save busin ess card . Certificates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. R0915_en.book Pag e 52 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 53 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Ringing tone - To save the ringing tone, select Options â Save . ⢠Operator logo - For the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options â Save . Tip! To change the default access point settings for multimedia messaging, select Messaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message â Access point in use . ⢠Calendar en try - To save the invitation, select Options â Save to C alendar . ⢠Web message - To save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options â Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point setti ngs and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options â Save all . ⢠E-mail notifi cation - Tells you how many new e-mails you have in you r remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Receiving Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are notification s (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availa bility and subscription, contact your service provider. My folders Tip! You can use texts in the Templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. In My folders, you ca n organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail a ccount, you are prompted to do so. See Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have several mailboxes (up to six). R0915_en.book Pag e 53 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 54 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Opening the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose wh ether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages an d e-mail headings offline or conn ect to the e-mail server. When you scroll to your mail box and pres s , the phone asks you i f you want to Conn ect to mailbox? ⢠Select Yes to connect to your mailbox and retrie ve new e-mail headings or messages. When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also Essent ial indicators , p. âÂÂ15â and Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . ⢠Select No to view previously retrieved e-mail me ssages offline. When you view e-mail messages offline, your phone is no t connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieving e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options â Connect t o start a connection to a remote mailbox. Important: E-mail messages may co ntain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options â Retrieve e-mail : ⢠New - to retrieve all new e-ma il messages to your phone. ⢠Selected - to retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. ⢠All - to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, press Cancel . 2 After you h ave retrieved the e- mail messages, you can continue viewing them online. Or, select Options â Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. Fig. 11 Mailbox with different status icons. R0915_en.book Pag e 54 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 55 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. E-mail status icons: - new e-mail (offline or online mode), the content has not been retrieved to your phone. - new e-mail, the content has been retrieved to your phone. - e-mail message has been read. - e-mail heading that has been read and the message content has been deleted from the phone. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been r etrieved (arrow in the icon is pointin g outwards) and you are offline, you will be asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail att achments, open a messag e that has the attac hment indicator , and select Opt ions â Attachments . If the attachment has a dimme d indicator, it has not been retrieved to the phone; se lect Options â Retrieve . In the Attachments view, you can retrieve, open, save, or remove attachment s. You can a lso send attachments using Bluetooth. T i p ! I f y o u r m a i l b o x u s e s the IMAP4 protocol, you can de fine how many messages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the atta chments or not. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headers only, partia lly (kB), or messages and attachments. Deleting e-mail messages ⢠To delete the contents of an e- mail message from the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options â Delete . In Dele te msg. fr om: select Phone only . Note: The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delet e the messa ge content, the e-ma il heading stays in your phone. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! To copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders, selec t Options â Copy to folder . Select a folder from the list, and press OK . ⢠To delete an e-mail from both the phone as well as from the remote mailbox, select Options â Delete msg. from: â Phone and server . Note: If you are offline, the e-mail is delete d first from your phone. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically del eted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the PO P3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connectio n to the remote mailbox. R0915_en.book Pag e 55 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 56 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To cancel deleting an e-mail from bo th th e phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options â Undelete . Disconnecting from the mailbox Tip! You can also leave your mailbox connection open and the new e-mails ( Headers only as default) will be retrieved fr om the remote mailbox to your phone automatically (only if IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server). To leave the Messaging application open in the background, press twice. Leaving the connection open may increase your call costs due to the data traf fic. When you are online, select Option s â Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox. See also Essential indicators , p. âÂÂ15â . Viewing e-mail messag es when offline When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query. You can read the previously retrieved e-mail headings or the retrieved e-mail messages or both. You can also write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent th e next time you connect to the mailbox. Outbox - messages waiting to be sent Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages wa iting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox: Sending , Waiting / Queued ⢠Resend at %U (time) - The phone will try to send the message again after a t ime-out period. Press Send to restart the sending immediately. ⢠Deferred - You can set documents to be âÂÂon holdâ while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is be in g sent and sele ct Options â Defer sending . ⢠Failed - The maximum number of sending atte mpts has been reached. Sending has fa i l ed . I f y o u w e r e t r y in g t o s e nd a t ex t message, open the message and check that the Sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your phone is outside network coverage. You can also sche dule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. R0915_en.book Pag e 56 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 57 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Viewing messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Opti ons â SIM messages . 2 Select Options â Mark/Unmarkâ Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options â Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and press OK to start copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Settings for text messages Options when editing text message centre settings: Edit , New msg. centre , Delete , Help , and Exit . Select Messaging â Optionsâ Settingsâ Text message. ⢠Message centres - Lists al l the text message servic e centr es that have been defin ed. ⢠M s g . c e n t r e i n u s e - Select which messa ge centre is used for delivering text messages. ⢠Receive report (network service) - To request the net work to send delivery reports on your messages. When set to No , o nly th e Sent status is sho wn in Log. See Log , p. âÂÂ25â . ⢠Message validity - If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the v alidity period, the message is removed from the text message service centre. The network must support this feature. Maximum tim e is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. ⢠Message sent as - Change this option only if you ar e sure that your service centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your network operator. ⢠Preferred connection - You ca n send text messages through the normal GSM network or through packet data, if supported by the network. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . ⢠Reply via same ctr. (network service) - Choose Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message service centre number. Adding a new text message ce ntre 1 Select Message ce ntres â Options â New ms g. centre . R0915_en.book Pag e 57 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 58 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Press , write a name f or the service centre, and press OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message service centre. You receive the number from your service provider. 4 Press OK . 5 To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new service centre. Settings for multimedia messages Select Messaging â Optionsâ Sett ingsâ Multi media message . ⢠Image size - Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Original (shown only when the MMS cre ation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Sm all and Large . S electing Original will increase the size of the multimedia message. ⢠MMS creation mode - If you sele ct Guided , the phone will inform you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. By selecting Restricted the phone will prevent you from sending messages that are not supported. ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - Select which access point is used as the preferred connection for th e multimedia message centre. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider through a n OTA message . Contact your service provider for more information . See also Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p . âÂÂ52â . ⢠Recept. in home ne t. - Select whether you want the re ception of the MMS messages in the home network to be Automatic , Defer retrieva l or Off . If you have selected Defer retrieval the multimedia messag ing centre will save the message. To retrieve the message later, set to Automatic . ⢠Reception if ro aming - Select how you want the MMS me ssages to be retrieved outside the home network. When you are outside your home network, sendin g and receiving multime dia messages may cost you more . If Reception if roaming â Automatic has been selected, your phone can automatically make an active packet da ta connection to retrieve the message. Select Off from Reception i f roaming if you do not want to receive multimedia messages when you are outside your home network. R0915_en.book Pag e 58 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 59 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Allow anon. messages - Select No if you want to reject messages coming from an anonymous sender. ⢠Receive adverts - Define whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements or not. ⢠Receive report (network service) - Set to Yes if you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the Log. Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multim edia message that has been sent to an e-mail address mi ght not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending - Choose Yes if you do not want your phone to send delivery reports of received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity - If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the v alidity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The network must suppor t this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Settings for e-mail Select Messaging â Optionsâ Settingsâ E-mail , or in the Mailbox main view, select Options â E-mail settings , and s elect: Mailbox in use - Select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes - Opens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailbox es have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to c hange the settings: Mailbox settings ⢠Mailbox name - Enter a descriptive name for the mailbox. ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - Choose an Intern et ac cess point (IAP ) for the mailbox. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . ⢠My e-mail address ( Must be defined ) - Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your me ssages are sent to this address. R0915_en.book Pag e 59 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 60 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Outgoing mail se rver ( Must be define d ) - Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e- mail. You may be able to use only the outgoing mail server of your network operator. Contact your se rvice provider/network operator for more information . ⢠Send message - Define how e-mail is sent from your phone: Immediatel y - The device starts to establish a connection to the mailbox after you have selected Send message . When conn. avail. - E-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. ⢠User name - Enter your user name, given to you by your service provider. ⢠Password: - Enter your password. If you lea ve this field blank, you will be prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. ⢠Incoming m ail serve r ( Must be define d ) - Enter the IP a ddress or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. ⢠Mailbox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol that yo ur remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see the latest e-mail messages , you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. ⢠Security (ports) - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. ⢠APOP secure login (not show n if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type ) - Used with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of pa sswords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settings ⢠E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - Define how many new e-mails will be retrieved to mailbox. ⢠Retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to IMAP4) - Define which parts of the e-mails will be retrieved: Hea d ers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. R0915_en.book Pag e 60 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 61 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - Choose whether you want to retrieve e- mail with or without attachments. ⢠Subscribed folders (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - You can subscribe other folders in remote mailbox as well and retrieve content from those folders. ⢠Send copy to self - Select Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-m ail address . ⢠Include signature - Select Yes if you want to attach a sign ature to your e-m ail messages. ⢠My name - Enter your own name h ere. Your name will replace your e - mail address in the recipientâÂÂs phone in case the recipi entâÂÂs phone is supporti ng this function. Automati c retriev al ⢠Header retrieval - When this function is on, you can define when and how often the messages will be retr ieved from the mailbox. Activating Header retrieval may increase y our call co sts due t o the data t raffic. Settings for Web service messages Select Messaging â Optionsâ Settin gs â Service mes sage . Choose whether or not you want to receive service messages. Download message s - Choose Automatically if you want to set the phone to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when the phone receives a ser vice message. Settings for cell broadcast (network service) Check the available topics and related to pic nu mbers with your service provider, and select Messaging â Options â Settin gs â Cell broadcast to change the setti ngs. ⢠Language - All allows you to receive cell br oadcast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Othe r . R0915_en.book Pag e 61 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 62 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Topic detection - If you have set Top ic detection â On , the phone will automatically search for new topic numbers, and save the new numbers without a name to the to pic list. Choose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging and select Options â Settingsâ Ot her. ⢠Save sent messages - Choose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder. Tip! If Memory card is selected, activate the Offline profile before opening the memory card slot door or removing the memory card. When the memory card is not available, mess ages will be saved in the phone memory. ⢠No. of saved msgs. - Define how many sent messages will be saved to the Sent items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 mess ages. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use - Choose to which memory you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . ⢠New e-mail alerts - Choose whether you want to see the new e-mail indications, like tone or a note, when new mail is received to the mailbox. R0915_en.book Pag e 62 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Calendar and To-do 63 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Calendar and To-do Shortcut: Press any key ( - ) in any calendar view. A Meeting entry is opened, and the characters you keyed in are added to the Subject fi eld. Calendar - creating calendar entries 1 Press and select Calendar . 2 Select Opti ons â New entry : ⢠Meeting to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to write a general entry for a day. ⢠Anniversary to remind you of birthdays or spec ial dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. Tip! If you are editing or deleting a repeated entry, ch o ose how you want the change to take effect: All occurrences - all repeated entries are deleted / This entry only - only the current entry will be deleted. For example, your weekly class has been cancelled. Yo u have set the calendar to remind you every week. Select This entry only and the calendar will remind you again next week. 3 Fill in the f ields. Use to move between fields. Alarm - Select On and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. Alarm is shown with in the Day view. Stopping a calendar alarm - Press Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text will stay on the screen. Press Stop to end the calendar alarm. Press Snooze to set the alarm to snooze. Repeat - Press to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the Day view). Repeat until - You can set an end date for the repeated entr y. Synchronisation - Private - after synchr onisation the calend ar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be shown to others wi th online access to view the calendar. Public - the calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None - the calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise. 4 To save the entry, press Done . Tip! You can send calendar entries to a compatible phone. See the Messaging chapter, and Sending data using Bluetooth , p. âÂÂ88â . R0915_en.book Pag e 63 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Calendar and To-do 64 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar views Tip! Select Options â Settin gs to change the view that is shown when you open the calendar or the starting day of the week. Tip! To send a calendar note, select Options â Sen d â Via text message / Via multimedia / Via Bluetooth . In the Month view, dates that have calendar en tries are marked with a small triangle at the right bottom corner. In the Week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. ⢠Icons in Day and Week views: - Memo , and - Anniversary . There is no icon for Meeting . ⢠To go to a cert ain date, select Options â Go to date . Write the date, and press OK . ⢠Press to jump to today. Tip! You can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your phone or synchronise your calendar and to-do to a compatible PC us ing Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Setting a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to remind you of a meetin g. This option is not available for notes and anniversaries. 1 Open a n ote in which you want to set an alarm, and select Alarm â On . 2 Set the Alarm time and Alarm date . 3 Scroll down to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeated. 4 Press Done . R0915_en.book Pag e 64 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Calendar and To-do 65 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. To delete a calendar alarm, open the note in which you want to delete an a larm, and select Alarm â Off . Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week start s on , and Week view title , select Options â Set tings . To-do - task list Press and select Organiser â To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. ⢠To add a note, press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. ⢠To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. ⢠To set the priority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority fi eld, and press to select the priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . ⢠To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options â Mark as done . ⢠To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and sel ect Options â Mark as not done . R0915_en.book Pag e 65 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 66 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web Various service providers mainta in pages specifically design ed for mobile devices. To access these pages, pres s and select Web . These pages use the Wireless Markup Language (WML), Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML), or Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, p ricing, and tariffs with yo ur network operator or service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Accessing the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See the sections Receiving browser settings or Keying in the settings manually . ⢠Make a connection to Web. Se e Making a connection , p. âÂÂ68â . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See Browsing , p. âÂÂ69â . ⢠End the connection to Web. See Ending a connection , p. âÂÂ7 1â . Receiving browser settings Tip! Settings may be available, for example, on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings i n a spec ial text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the Web page . See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Keying in the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. R0915_en.book Pag e 66 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 67 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 1 Select Tools â Settings â Connection â Access points , and define the settings for an access point. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . Options in the Bookmarks view: Open , Download , Back to page , Bookmark man ager , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Send , Find bookmark , Details , Settings , Help and Exit . 2 Select Web â Options â Bookmark manager â Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defined for the curr ent access point. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page re quires, a user name and password. Note: Your device may hav e some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse th ese sites. If you choose to acces s them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. The starting page defined for the default access point. If you use another default access point for browsing, t he star ting page is c hanged accordingly. The automatic bookmarks folder contai ns bookmark s ( ) that are collected automatically when you browse pages. The b ookmarks in thi s folder are automatic ally organised according to domain. Any bookmark showing the title or Internet address of the bookmark. Shortcut: To start a connection, press and hold in standby mode. Adding bookmarks manually 1 In the Bookmarks view, select Options â Bookmark managerâ Add bookmark. 2 Start to fill in the fields. Only the URL addr ess must be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Select Options â Save to save the bookmark. R0915_en.book Pag e 67 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 68 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Sending bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark, and select Options â Send â Via text me ssage . Press to send. It is possible to send more than one bookmark at the same time. Making a connection Tip! To send a bookmark, scroll to it, and select Options â Sendâ Via text message . Once you have stored all the required conn ection settings, you can access the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or wr ite the address in the Go to field ( ). When you write the address, matching bookmarks are shown at the top of the Go to field. Press to select a matching bookmark. Options when browsing (depend on the page you are viewing): Open , Accept , Remove file , Op en in viewer , Open Wallet , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , View images , Navigation opti ons , Advanced options , Show images , Send bookmark , Find , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 2 Press to start to download the page. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed du ring a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that th e dat a transmission be tween the gateway and the content server (or place where the requeste d resource is stored) is sec ure. The service provider secures the data tr ansmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Options â Detailsâ Security to view details about the connection, encryptions status, and informa tion about se rver and user authentication. Security features may be required for some servi ces, such as banking se rvices. For such connections you need security cert ificates. For more information, contact your service provider. See also Certif. management , p. âÂÂ103â . R0915_en.book Pag e 68 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 69 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Browsing On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. ⢠To open a link, to check boxes, and make selections, press . ⢠To go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not availabl e, select Options â Navigation options â History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The hi s tory list is cleared each time a session is closed. ⢠To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options â Navigation options â Reload . ⢠To save a bookmark, select Option s â Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the Bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view again, select Options â Back to page . ⢠To save a page while browsing, select Options â Advanced options â Save page . You can save pages either to the phone memory or on a memory card, and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the Boo kmarks view to open the Saved pages view. ⢠To enter a new URL address, select Options â Navigation options â Go to web address . ⢠To open a sublist of commands or action s for the currently open page, select Options â Service options . ⢠You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your phone, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Shortcut: Use to jump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. Copyright protections may prev ent some images, ringing to nes, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Important: Only install soft ware from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful sof tware. ⢠To download and view new Web servic e messages while browsing, select Options â Advanced options â Re ad service msgs . (shown only if there are new messages). See also Receiving Web service messages , p. âÂÂ53â . R0915_en.book Pag e 69 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 70 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing saved pages If you regularly browse pages containing info rmation which does not c hange very often, you can save and browse them when offline. In the saved pages view you can also c reate folders to store your saved browser pages. Options in the Saved pages view: Open , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , Mark/ Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠To open the Saved pages view, press in the Bookmarks view. In the Saved pages view, press to open a saved page ( ). ⢠To save a page, while browsing select Options â Advanced options â Save page . ⢠To start a connection to the brows er service and to download the latest version of the page, select Op tions â Reload . The phone stays online after you reload the page. Tip! Your browser collects bookmarks automatically while you are browsing Web pages. The bookmarks are stored to the Automatic bookmarks folder ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also Settings for Web , p. âÂÂ71â . Downloading and purchasing items You can download items such as ringing to ne s, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Thes e items can b e provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your phone, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important: Only install applications from sources that offer adequate protection against harm ful software. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . ⢠If the item is provided free, press Accept . On ce downloaded, the content is automatically opened in a suitable application. To cancel the download, press Cancel . 2 Choose the appropriate option to pu rchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully read all the info rmation provided . If the online content is compatible, you ca n use your wallet information to make the purchase. R0915_en.book Pag e 70 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 71 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 4 Select Ope n Wallet . You will be prompted for your wa llet code. See Creating a wallet code , p. âÂÂ76â . 5 Select the appropriate card category from your wallet. 6 Select Fill in . This will upload the se lected wallet information. If the wallet does not contain all informatio n necessary for the pu rc hase, you will be requested to enter the re maining details manually. Note: Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Ending a connection Select Options â Advanced options â Disconnect , or press and hold to quit b rowsing and to return to the standby mode. Emptying the cache The information or services you have access ed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. Note: A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed conf idential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. T he inform ation or services you have accessed is stored in the cache memory of the phone. To empty the cache, select Options â Navigation options â Clear cache . Settings for Web Select Options â Settings: ⢠Default access poi nt - To change the default access point, press to open a list of available access points. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . R0915_en.book Pag e 71 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 72 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Show images - To select if you want to load im ages while browsing or not. If you choose No , you can later load images during browsing by selecting Options â Show images . ⢠Font size - To choose the text size. ⢠Default encoding - If text characters are not show n correctly, you may choose another encoding according to language. ⢠Automatic bookmarks - To disable automatic b ookmark collec ting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automati c bookmarks but hide the folder from the Bookmarks view, sele ct Hide folder . ⢠Screen size - To select what is shown when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only , or Full screen . ⢠Search page - To define a Web page that w ill be downloaded when you select Navigation options â Open search page in the Bookmarks view, or when browsing. ⢠Volume - If you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web p ages, select a volume level. ⢠Rendering - If you want the page layout show n as accurately as possib le when in Small screen mode, select By quality . I f you do not want exte rnal cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and their preferences for frequently used content. ⢠Cookies - To enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. ⢠Java/ECMA script - To enable or disable the use of scripts. ⢠Security warnings - To hide or show security notifications. ⢠Conf. DTMF sending - Choose whethe r you want to confirm before the phone sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also âÂÂDT MF tonesâÂÂ, p. âÂÂ25â . ⢠Wallet - On to open the wallet automatically wh en a compatible browser page is opened. See Wallet , p. âÂÂ75â . R0915_en.book Pag e 72 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 73 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Organiser Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages, press and select Organiser â Calculator. Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calc ulations. To save a number in the memory (indicated by M ), select Options â Memory â Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Opti ons â Memory â Recall . To clear a number in memory, select Options â Memory â Clear . Calculating percentages 1 Enter a number for which you want to calcu l ate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Notes Press and selec t Organiser â Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compatible devices and plain text files (TXT format) that you receive can be saved to N otes. R0915_en.book Pag e 73 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 74 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Go to - adding shortcuts Default shortc uts : opens Calendar , opens Inbox an d opens Notes . To store shortcuts, link s to your favourite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on, press and select Organiser â Go to . Shortcuts can be added only fr om the individual applications, like Gallery. Not all applicat ions have this func tion. 1 Select an item from an application to which you w ant to add a shortcut. 2 Select Add to 'Go to' . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item to which it is pointing, for examp le, from one folder to another. ⢠To change the identifier in the lower left corner of th e shortcut icon, select Options â Shortcut icon . Deleting a shortcut Select the shortcut and pr ess . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an application or a docume nt which has a shortcut in the Go to, the shortcut icon of the removed item will be di mmed in the Go to v iew. The shortcut can be deleted next time you try to open the shortcut. Converter - converting measures Options in Converter: Select unit / Chan ge currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . To convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ), press and select Organiser â Converter . Note that the Converter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding erro rs may occ ur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use, and press OK . R0915_en.book Pag e 74 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 75 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to the first Uni t field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert, and press OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and ente r the value yo u want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Setting a base currency and exchange rates Tip! To change the conversion order, enter the value in the second Amount fi eld. The r esult is shown in the first Amount fiel d. Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency deter m ines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1 Select Converter â Option s â Currency rates . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options â Set as base curr. . Tip! To rename a currency, go to the Currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options â Rename currency . Note: When you change base currency, you must key in the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency , and key in a new rate, that is , how many units of the currency equal one unit of the base currency you have selected. After you have inserted all the necessa ry exchange rates, you can make curren cy conversions. Wallet Press and select Organiser â Wallet . Wallet provides you with a storage area for your personal information, such as credit and debit card numbers, addresses and other useful data, for example, user names a nd passwords. R0915_en.book Pag e 75 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 76 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. The information stored in the wallet can be retrieved while browsing to aut omatically fill in online forms on browser pages, for example, when the service asks for credit card details. Data in the wallet is encrypted and protec ted with a wallet code that you define. Wallet will automatically close after 5 minutes. Enter the wallet code to regain access to the contents. You can change this automati c time-out period if required. See Wallet settings , p. âÂÂ78â . Options in the wallet main view: Open , Settings , Help , and Exit . Creating a wallet code Each time you open the wallet you will be prom pted for a wallet c ode. Enter the code that you have created, and press OK . When you open the wallet for the first time, you must create your own wallet code: 1 Enter a code of your choice (4-10 alpha numeric characters ), and press OK . 2 You will be prompted to verify the code. Enter the same code, and p ress OK . Do not give your wallet code to a nyone else. If you enter the wallet code incorrectly on three consecutive occasio ns, the wallet application is blocked for five minutes. The block time increa ses if further incorrect wallet codes are entered. If you forget your wallet code, you will ha ve to res et the code, and you will lose all information stored in the wallet. Resetting the wallet and wallet code , p. âÂÂ78â . Storing personal card details 1 Select the Cards category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select a type of card from t he list, and press . ⢠Payment cards - Credit and debit cards. ⢠Loyalty cards - Membership and store cards. ⢠Online acc. car ds - Personal user names and pa sswords to online serv ices. ⢠Address cards - Basic contac t details for home/office. R0915_en.book Pag e 76 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 77 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠User info cards - Customised personal preferences for online services. 3 Select Options â New card . An empty form opens. 4 Fill in the fi elds, and press Done . You can also receive card information directly to the phone from a ca rd issuer or service provider (if they offer this service). You will be notified whic h category the card belongs to. Save or discard the card. You can view and rename a saved card, but you cannot edit it. You can open, edit, or delete the fields in th e card. Any changes will be saved upon exi ting. Creating personal notes Personal notes are a means of storing sensit ive informa tion, for exa mple, a bank account number. You can access th e data in a personal note from the browser. You can also sen d the note as a mes sage. 1 Select the Personal notes category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options â New card . An empty note opens. 3 Press - to start writing. Press to clear characters. 4 Press Done to save. Creating a wallet profile Once you have stored your pers onal details, you can combine them together into a wall et profile. You can use a wallet profile to re trieve wallet data fro m different cards and categories to the browser. For examp le, when you are filling in a form. 1 Select the Wal let profiles category from the main wallet menu, and pre ss . 2 Select Options â New profile . A new wallet profile form opens. 3 Fill in the fields or select an option from the listed items. R0915_en.book Pag e 77 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 78 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Example: By uploading your payme nt card det ails you do not need to enter the card number and expiry date each time you need them (depending on the content being browsed). Also, you can retrieve you r user name and password stored as an access card when connecting to a mobile service that requires authentication. ⢠Profile name - Choose and enter a name for the profile. ⢠Payment card , Loyalty card , Online access card , Shipping address , ⢠Billing addres s - By default this is the same as th e Ship ping address. If you require a different address, select one from the Addres s card category. ⢠User info card , ⢠Receive e- receipt - Select a destination from the Address card category. ⢠Deliver e-receipt and ⢠RFID sending - Set to On or Off . Defines whether or not your unique phone identification is sent with the wallet profile. 4 Press Done . Viewing ticket details You can receive n otifications of tickets purc hased online through the browser. Received notifications are stored in the wa llet. To view the notifications : 1 Select the Tickets category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options â View . None of the fields within th e notification can be modified. Wallet settings From the main wallet menu, select Options â Settings : ⢠Wallet code - Change your wallet code. You will be prompted to enter the current c ode, create a new code, and verify the new code. ⢠RFID - Set the phone ID co de, type, and sending options. ⢠Automatic close - Change the automatic time-out period (1-60 minutes). After the time-out period has elapsed, the wallet code mus t be re -en ter ed t o ga in acc ess to t he contents. Resetting the wallet and wallet code This operation erases all contents of the wallet. R0915_en.book Pag e 78 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 79 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. To reset both the contents of the wallet and the wallet code: 1 Enter *#7 370925538# in the standby mode. 2 Enter the phone lock code, and press OK . See Security , p. âÂÂ101â . When opening the wallet again, you must en ter a new wallet code. Creating a wallet code , p. âÂÂ76â . R0915_en.book Pag e 79 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 80 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. IM - Instant Messaging (chat) Press and select Tools â IM . Instant messaging is a network service which allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion fo rums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers main tain IM servers that you can log in to once you have registered to an IM service. Options in the IM main vi ew: Open , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , Exit . Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/or service provider. Service prov iders will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Receiving IM settings Tip: To log in automatically when you start IM, without having to enter your user ID and password each time, select Options â Settings â Server settings â IM login type â Automatic . You must save the sett ings to access the se rvice that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message, a so-called smart messag e, from the network operator or service provider that offers the IM service. See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52âÂÂ. You can also enter the settings manually. See Chat server settings , p. âÂÂ86â . Connecting to an IM server 1 Open IM to have your phone connect to the IM se rver in use. To change the IM server in use and save new IM servers, see Chat server settings , âÂÂ86â . Once the connection has been established: R0915_en.book Pag e 80 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 81 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 2 Enter your user ID and pass word, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, sele ct Options â Login . You cannot send or receive me ssages while you are offline. 3 To log out, select Options â Logo ut . Modifying your IM settings Select Options â Settingsâ IM se ttings: Options in the Conversations list: Open , Delete , Add to IM contacts , New conversation , Set au to reply on , Blocking options , End conversation , Login , Settings , Help , Exit . ⢠Use screen name (shown only if IM groups suppor ted by the server) - To enter a nickname (up to10 characters), select Yes . ⢠IM presen ce - To allow others to see if you are online, select Active for all . ⢠Allow messages from - To allow mess ages from all, selec t All. ⢠Allow invitations from - To allow invitations only fr om your IM contacts, select IM contacts only . IM invitations are sent by IM contac ts who want you to join their groups. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed - To select the speed a t which new messages are displayed. ⢠Sort IM contacts - To sort your IM contacts Alphabetically or By online status. ⢠Availability reloading - To choose how to update in formation about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automatic or Ma nual . Searching for IM groups and users ⢠To search for groups, in the IM groups view, sel ect Options â Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). ⢠To search for users, in t he IM contac ts view, select Opti ons â Search . You can search by User's name , Us er ID, Phone num ber , and E-mail address . R0915_en.book Pag e 81 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 82 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Joining and leaving an IM group ⢠To join a IM grou p that you have sa ved, scroll to the group, and press . ⢠To join an IM group not on the list, bu t for which you know the group ID , select Options â Join new group . Enter the group ID, and press . ⢠To leave the IM group, select Options â Leave IM group . Chatting Once you have joined an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. Options while chatting: Send , Send private msg. , Reply , Forward , Insert smiley , Send invita tion , Leave IM group , Add to banned list , Group , Record convers. / Stop recording , Help , and Exit . ⢠To send a message, write the message in the message editor field, and press . ⢠To send a privat e message to participant, select Options â Send private msg . , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, selec t the message and select Options â Reply . ⢠To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options â Send invitation , select the contacts you want to in vite, write the invitation message, and press . ⢠To prevent receiving messages fro m certain participants, select Options â Blocking options and select: ⢠Add to blocked list - to block messages from the currently selected participant . ⢠Add ID to li st manually - to enter the user ID of the participant. Enter the ID and press . ⢠View blocked li st - to see the participants wh ose messages are being blocked. ⢠Unblock - to select the user that you want to remove from the blocked list. Press . R0915_en.book Pag e 82 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 83 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Recording chats Options in the Recorded chats view: Open , Delete , Send , Mark/ Unmark , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , Exit . ⢠To record to a file the messages that are exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Options â Record convers. , enter a name for the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, select Options â Stop recording . The recorded conversation files are automatically saved in the Recorded chats . ⢠To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation and press . Viewing and starting conversations Options when viewing a conversation: Send , Add to IM contacts , Insert smiley , Forward , Record convers. / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , Exit Go to the Conversations view to see a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . ⢠To continue the conversation, write your message and press . ⢠To return to the conversations list wi thout closing the co nversation, press Back . ⢠To close the conversation, select Options â End conve rsation . Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit Chat. To start a new conversation , select Options â New conversation : ⢠Select recipient - To see a list of your chat contacts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that you want to start a conversation with, and press . Glossary: The user ID is provided by the service provider to those who register to this service. ⢠Enter user ID - To en ter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation with, and press . To save a conversation participant to your IM contacts, scroll to the participant and select Options â Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Opt ions â Se t auto reply on . Enter the text and press Done . You can still receive messages. R0915_en.book Pag e 83 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 84 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. IM contacts Go to the IM contacts to retrieve chat contac t lists from the server, or to add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previous ly used chat cont act list will be retrieved from the server auto matically. ⢠To create a new conta ct, select Options â New IM contactâ Enter m anually . Fill in the Nickname and User ID fields, and press Done . ⢠To move a contact from a list on the server to the retrieved li st, select Options â New IM contact â Move from other list . Options in the IM contacts view: Open conversation , Open , Change contact list , Reload user availab. , Belongs to groups , New IM contact , Move to other list , Edit , Delete , Switch tracking on , Blocking options , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠To change the ch at contact list, select Options â Change contact list . ⢠Select Options : ⢠Open conversati on - To start a new conversation or continue an ongoing conversation with the contact. ⢠Switch tracking on - To have the phone notify you every time the chat contact goes online or offline. ⢠Belongs to groups - To see which groups the chat contact has joined. ⢠Reload us er availab. - To update information about whether the contact is online or offline. The online status is shown by an indicator next to the cont act name. This option is not available if you have set the Availability reloading to Automatic in IM settings . Managing IM groups Options in the IM groups view: Open , Join new group , Create new group , Leave IM group , Group , Search , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have either saved or are currently joined to . Scroll to a group, and select Options â Group : ⢠Save - To save an unsaved group that you are currently joined to. ⢠View participants - To see who are currently joined to the group. R0915_en.book Pag e 84 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 85 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Details - To see the group ID, topic, participan ts, administrators of the group (shown only if you have the editing rights), the list of banned participants (shown only if you have the editing rights), and whether whispering is allowed in the group. ⢠Settings - To view and edit the chat group settings. See Creating a new IM group , p âÂÂ85â . Administrating an IM group Creating a new IM group Select IM groups â Options â Create new gr oup . Enter the settings for the group. You can edit the settings for an IM group if you have administrator rights to the group. The user who creates a group is automati cally given administrator rights to it. ⢠Group name -, Group topic -, ⢠Welcome note - To add a note that the participants see when they join the group, ⢠Group size - To define the maximum number of members allowed to join the group, ⢠Allow search - , ⢠Editing rights - To define the chat group partic ipants to whom you want to give administration rights permissi on to invite contacts t o jo in the IM group and edit the group settings. ⢠Group members - See Adding and removing group members , p. âÂÂ85â . ⢠Banned list - Enter the participants that are not allowed to join the IM group. ⢠Allow private msgs. - To allow messag ing between selected participants o nly. ⢠Group ID - The group ID is created auto matically and cannot be changed. Adding and removing group members ⢠To add members to a group, select IM groups , scroll to an IM group, and select Options â Group â Settin gs â Group members â Selected only or All . R0915_en.book Pag e 85 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 86 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To remove a member from the IM group, scroll to the member, a nd select Options â Remove . To remove all members, select Options â Remove all . Chat server settings Select Options â Settings â Server settings . You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider th at offers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider, when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or password, contact your service provider. ⢠To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default server . ⢠To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers â Options â New server . Enter the following settings: ⢠Server name - Enter the name for the chat server. ⢠Access point in use - Select the access point yo u want to use for the server. ⢠Web address - Enter the URL address of the IM server. ⢠User ID - Enter your user ID. ⢠Password - Enter your login password. R0915_en.book Pag e 86 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 87 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Connectivity Bluetooth connection Bluetooth enables wireless connections to s end images, video clips, music and sound clips and notes, or to connect wirelessly to Blue tooth enabled, compatible devices such as computers. Since Bluetooth devices communica te using radio waves, your phone and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in di rec t line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metr es of ea ch other, although the c onnection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Blueto oth Speci fication 1.1 supporting the following profiles: Generic Access Profil e, Serial Port Profile, Dial-up Networki ng Profile, Headset Profile, Handsfree Profile, Generic Object Exchange Pr ofile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, and Basic Imaging Profile. To en sure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nok ia appr oved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to de termine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features that use Bluetooth te chnology, or allow such featur es to run in the background while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power and reduces the battery life. Press and select Connect. â Bluetooth . You are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phone. Bluetooth settings ⢠Bluetooth - On/ Off R0915_en.book Pag e 87 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 88 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠My phone's visibility - Shown to all : your phone can be found by other Bluetooth devices, or Hidden : your phone cannot be found by other devices. Icons for different Bluetooth devices: - Computer - Phone - Audio/video - Headset - Other ⢠My phone's name - Define a Bluetooth name for your phone. After you have set Bluetooth to be active and chan ged My phone's visi bility to Shown to all , your phone and this name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Sending data using Bluetooth There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a time. 1 Open an application where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another comp atible devi ce, open the Gallery application. 2 Select the item, for example an image, and select Options â Send â Via Bluetooth . Tip! When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Bluetooth addresses (device addresses). To find the unique Bluetooth address of your phone, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. The phone starts to se arch for devices within range. Bluetooth enabled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the Bluetooth name of the device, the device type, or a short name. Tip! If you have searched for Bluetooth devi ces earlier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list is cleared. ⢠To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a connection to one of the devices already found. 3 Scroll to the device with which you want to connect, and press Select . 4 Pairing (if required by the other devi ce) Glossary: Pairing means authentication. The us ers of the Bluetooth enabled devices should agree what the passcode is and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that do not have a user interface h ave a factory-set passcode. ⢠If the other device requires pairing before data can be tr ansmitted, a tone sounds an d you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1 -16 characters long, numeric) and agree with the owner of the other Bluetooth device to use the sa me code. The passcode is used only once. R0915_en.book Pag e 88 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 89 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! To send text using Bluetooth (instead of text messages), go to Notes, write the text, and select Options â Se nd â via Bluetooth . ⢠After pairing, the device is sa ved to the Paired devices view. When the connection has been established, the note Se nding data is shown. The Drafts folder in Mess aging does no t store messages sent using Bluetooth. Checking the status of the Bluetooth connection ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, Bluetooth is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is tr ying to connect to the other dev ice. ⢠When is shown continuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Pairing devices Tip! To define a short name (nickname or alias), scrol l to the device and select Optio ns â Assign short name in the Paired devices view. This name helps you to recognise a certain device during device search or when a device requests a connection. Paired devices are easier to recognise, they ar e indicated by in the device search. In the Bluetooth main view, press to o p en the Paired devices view ( ). ⢠To pair with a device, select Options â New paire d device . The phone starts a device search. Scroll to the device, and press Select . Exchange passcodes, see step 4 (Pairing), p. âÂÂ88â . ⢠To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options â Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options â Delete all . Tip! If you are currently connected to a de vice and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately , but the connection remains active. ⢠To set a device to be authorised or una uthorised, scroll to a device, and select Opt ions : Set as authorised - Connections between your phon e and this dev ice can be made without your knowledge. No se parate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible Bluetooth head set or PC, or devices that belong to some one you trust. The ic on is added next to authorised devices in the Paired devices view. Set as unauthorised - Connection requests from this device need to be accepted separately every time. R0915_en.book Pag e 89 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 90 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving data using Bluetooth When you receive data using Bluetooth, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the Bluetooth message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Blueto oth messag es are indicated by . See Inbox - receiving messages , p. âÂÂ5 1â . Switching off Bluetooth To switch off Bluetooth, select Bluetooth â Off . PC connections - using Bluetooth or USB You can use your phone with a varie ty of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia PC Suite you can, fo r example, synchronise contacts, calendar and To-do no tes betwe en your ph one and a co mpatib le PC. For fu rther information on how to install Nokia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP), see the UserâÂÂs Guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nokia PC Suite he lp in the âÂÂInstallâ section on the CD- ROM. Using the CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch after you have in serted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: Op en Windows Explorer, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD- ROM, and select AutoPlay. Using your phone as a modem You can use your phone as a modem to send and receive e-mails, or to connect to the Internet with a compatible PC by using a Blue tooth connection, or a data cable. Detailed R0915_en.book Pag e 90 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 91 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. installation instructions can be found in th e UserâÂÂs Guide f or Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Connection manager You may have multiple data co nnections active at the same time when you are using your phone in GSM and UMTS networks. Press and select Connect. â Conn. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Connection manager, you can see a list of: Options in the Connection manager main view when there are one or more connections: Details , Disconnect , Disconnect all , Help and Exit . ⢠open data connections: data calls ( ), and packet data connections ( ) ⢠the status of each connection ⢠the amount of data upload ed and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠the duration of each connectio n (shown for data calls only). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, round ing off for billing, and so forth. ⢠To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options â Disconnect . ⢠To close all currently open connections, select Options â Disconnect all . Viewing data connection details To view the details of a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options â Details . ⢠Name - The name of the Internet access poin t (IAP) in use, or âÂÂModem connectionâ if the connection is a dial-up connection. ⢠Bearer - The type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet data. ⢠Status - The current status of the connection: Connecti ng , Conn.(inact.) , Conn.(a ctive) , On hold , Discon nctng. , or Disconn ected . ⢠Received - The amount of data, in by tes, received to the phone. ⢠Sent - The amount of data, in bytes, sent from the phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 91 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 92 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Duration - The length of time tha t the connection has been open. ⢠Speed - The current speed of b oth sending and receiving data in %U kB/s (kilobytes per second). ⢠Name - Access point na me used o r Dial-up - the dial-up number used. ⢠Shared (not shown if the connection is not sh ared) - The number of applicati ons using the same connection. Sync - remote synchronisation Press and select Connect. â Sy nc . The Sync application enable s you to synchronise your calendar, and contacts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation application uses Sync ML technology for sy nchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, please contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone data with. You may receive Sync settings in a special text message. See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . Creating a new synchronisation pro file Options in the Remote sync main view: Synchronise , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Delete , View log , Set as default , Help , and Exit . 1 If no profiles have been defined, the phone asks if you want to cre ate a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addi tion to existing ones, select Options â New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default se tting values or copy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name - Write a descriptive name for the profile. Data bearer - Select the connection type: Web or Bluetooth . Access point - Select an access point you want to use for the data connection. R0915_en.book Pag e 92 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 93 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Host address - Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port - Contact your service provider or syst em administrator for the correct values. User name - Your user ID for the synchronisatio n server. Contact your service provider or system administrato r for your correct ID. Password - Write your password. Contact your se rvice provider or system administrator for the correct value. Allow sync requests - Select Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Accept all sync reqs. - Select No if you want the phone to ask you before a synchronisation initial ised by the server is started. Network authe ntic. (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web ) - Select Yes to enter a network user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. Press to se lect: Contacts , Calendar , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchron ise the select ed database. ⢠Remote database - Select the synchronis ation type Normal (two-way synchronisation), To server only , or To phone only . ⢠Enter a correct path to the remote calendar , address book, or notes database on the server. 3 Press Back to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronising data In the Sync main view, you can see the differ ent synchronisation profiles, and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Op tions â Sync hronise . The status of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchronisation be fore it is finished, press Cancel . R0915_en.book Pag e 93 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 94 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 You ar e notified when the synchronisatio n is complete. After synchronisation is complete , select Options â View log to open a log file show ing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplet e ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronised) in the phone or on the server. R0915_en.book Pag e 94 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 95 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tools Settings To change settings, press and select Tools â Setti ngs . Scroll to a setting group, and press to o pen it. Scroll to a setti ng you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language - Changing the language of the displa y texts in your phone will als o affect the format used for date and time and the se parators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the display text language, the phone restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or W riting lan guage affects every application in your phone and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language - Changing the language af fects the characters and special charac ters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary - You can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the phone. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note or logo - The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters), or Image to select a photo or pict ure from Gallery . Orig. phone se ttings - You can reset some of the setting s to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See Security , Phone and SIM , p. âÂÂ101â . After resetting the Fig. 12 Adjusting the display brightness. R0915_en.book Pag e 95 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 96 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. settings, the phone may take a longer ti me to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode You can assign keypad shortcuts for the di fferent keypr esses in the standby mode: is the Left selection key , pressing is the same as N avigation key right , and is the same as Selection key . You cannot have a shortcut to an application that you ha ve installed. Operator logo - This setting is visible only if you ha ve received and saved an operator logo. You can choose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness - You can change the brightness of the display to lighter or darker. The brighness of the display is automaticall y adjusted ac cording to the environment. Screen saver timeout - The screen saver is activated when the timeout period is over. Light t ime-out - Select a timeout after which the backlight will be switched off. Call settings Send my caller ID (network service) - You can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are callin g; or the value may be set by your network operator or service provid er when you make a subscription ( Set by network ). Call waiting (network service) - If you have activa t ed call waiting, the network will notify you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the networ k to deactivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Reject call wi th SMS - Se lect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See Answering or rejecting a call , p. âÂÂ23â . Fig. 13 The screen saver changes to show the number of new messages or missed calls. R0915_en.book Pag e 96 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 97 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Message text - Write a text to be sent in a te xt messag e when you reject a call. Image in vide o call - You can deny video sending when you receive a video call. Select a still image to be displayed instead of video. Tip! To change the settings for call diverting, press and select Tools â Settings â Call divert . See Call diverting , p. âÂÂ104â . Automatic redial - Select On , and your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuc cessful call attempt. Press to st op automatic redialling. Summary after call - Activate this setting if you wa nt the phone to briefly display the approximate duration of the last call. Speed dialling - Select On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys ( - ) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also Speed dialling a phone number , p. âÂÂ22â . Anykey answer - Select On , and you can answer a n incoming call by briefly pressing any key, except , , , and . Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in standby mode. Line in use (network service) - This setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text mess ages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you se lect Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When lin e 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Line change (network service) - To prevent line selection, select Line change â Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your phone supports packet data connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. See also Essential indicators , p. âÂÂ15â . To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of ac cess points, such as: R0915_en.book Pag e 97 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 98 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠MMS access point to, fo r example, se nd and receive multimedia messages, Glossary: GPRS , General Packet Radio Service, uses packet data technology where information is sent in short packets of data over the mobile network. ⢠access point for the Web application to view WML or XHTML pages, and ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to, for example, send and receive e-mail. Check the kind of an access point you need wi th your service provider for the service you wish to access. For availability and subscripti on to packet data connection services, contact your network operator or service provider. Packet data connections in GS M and UMTS networks When you are using your phone in GSM and UMTS networks it is possible to have multiple data connections active at the same time; access points can share a data connection; and data connections remain active (for example, during voice calls). For information on how to see how many data connections are active, see Connection manager , p. âÂÂ91â . See also network indicators in Essential indicators , p. âÂÂ15â . The following indicators may appear below the signal indicator, depending on which network you are using: - GSM network, packet data is available in the network. - GSM network, packet data connection is active, data is being transferred. - GSM network, multiple packe t data connections are active. - GSM network, packet data connection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) - UMTS network, pa cket data is available in the network. - UMTS network, packet data connection is active, data is being transferred. - UMTS network, multiple pack et data connections are active. - UMTS network, pa cket data connection is on hold. R0915_en.book Pag e 98 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 99 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Receiving access point settings You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may have preset access point settings in your ph one. See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . ⢠To create a new access point, select Tools â Settings â Conne ction â Access points . An access point may be set to b e protecte d ( ) by your network operator or servic e provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Options in the Access points list: Edit , New access point , Delete , Help , an d Exit . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provid er. Connection name - Giv e a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer - Depending on what data connection yo u select, only cer t ain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defi ned or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, un less you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. Options when editing access point settings: Change , Advanced settings , Help , and Exit . To be able to use a data connection, the netw ork service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only) - The access point name is needed to esta blish a connection to the packet data and UMTS networks. You obtain th e access point name from your network operator or service provider. Tip! See also Receiving MMS and e- mail settings , p. âÂÂ51â , Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â , and Accessing the Web , p. âÂÂ66â . User name - The user name may be needed to ma ke a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The user name is often case-sensitive. Prompt password - If you must enter a new password ev ery time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the phone, choose Yes . Password - A password may be needed to ma ke a data connection, and is us ually provided by the service provider. The pass word is often case-sensitive. R0915_en.book Pag e 99 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 100 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Authentication - Normal or Secure . Homepage - Depending on what you are setting up , write either the Web address, or the address of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options â Advanced sett ings to change the following settings: Glossary: DNS - Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates d omain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195 Network type - Select the Internet protocol type to be used: IPv4 settings or IPv6 settings . Phone IP address - The IP address of your phone. Name servers - Primary name server: The IP address of th e primary DNS server, Second. Name server: The IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy serv. ad dress - Define the address for the proxy server. Proxy port numb er - Enter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affe ct all access points usin g a packet data connection. Packet data conn. - If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the phone registers to the packet da ta network. Also, starting an active pack et data connection is quicker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When needed , the phone uses a packet data connection on ly if you start an application or action that needs it. If there is no packet data coverage and you have chosen When available , the phone will periodically try to establish a packet data connection. Access point - The access point name is needed to use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from yo ur network operator or service provider in a configuration message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM or US IM card. Thes e settings can be saved to yo ur phone and viewed or deleted in Configurations. R0915_en.book Pag e 100 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 101 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Date and time Tip! See also the Language settings, p. âÂÂ95â . See Clock settings , p. âÂÂ16â . Security Phone and SI M PIN (Personal Identification Nu mber) code (4 to 8 dig its) protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PI N code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about PUK code in this section. UPIN code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. The UPIN code pro tects the USIM card against unauthorised use. PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) su pplied with some SIM cards, is required to access some functions in your phone. Lock code (5 digits) can be used to lock the phone to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of your phone, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) and PUK2 codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. UPUK code may be supplied with the USIM card an d is needed to unblock a UPIN code. Wallet code is needed to use the wa llet services. See Wallet , p. âÂÂ75â . R0915_en.book Pag e 101 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 102 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. PIN code request - When active, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Deactivating the PIN co de request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code - You can change the lock code, PIN co de, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . Tip! To lock the phone manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Avoid using access codes similar to the emer gency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Autoloc k period - You can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls in Offline profile to certain emergency numbers programmed into yo ur phone are still possible. Options in the Fixed dialling view: Open , Call , Activ. fixed dialling / Deact. fixed dialling , New contact , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Find , Mark/ Unmark , Help , and Exit . Lock if SIM changed - You can set the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknown, n e w S IM c a r d i s i n s e r t e d in t o y o u r p h o n e . T h e phone maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Fixed dialling - You can restrict calls a nd text me ssages from your phone to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. To view the list of Fixed dia lling numbers, press and select Tools â Settings â Security â Phone and SIMâ Fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the Fixed dialling list, select Options â New contac t or Add from Contacts . When you use fixed dialling, packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In this case, the message cent re number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number have to be included on the fixed dialling list. Note: When securi ty features that restrict calls are in use (such as call barring, closed user group and fixed dialling) call s sti ll may be possible to the official emergency numbers programmed into your phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 102 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 103 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Closed user group (network service) - To specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Confirm SIM services (network s ervice) - To set th e phone to display confirmatio n messages when you are us ing a SIM card service. Certif. management Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origins of software. In the Certificate management main view, you ca n see a list of authority cert ificates that have been stored in your phone. Press to s ee a list of personal certi ficates, if available. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML or WML pages and installed software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates should be used if y ou want to connect to an online b ank or another site or remote server for ac tions that involve transferring c onfidential information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malic ious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation cons iderably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from incr eased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself ; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased securi ty to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certificate shou ld be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. Viewing certi ficate details - ch ecking authentici ty You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server cert ificate have been checked. You will be notified on the phone display if the identity of the server is not authent ic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 103 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 104 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the certificate management main view: Ce rtificate details , Delete , Trust settings , Mark /Unmark , Help , and Exit . To check certificat e details, scroll to a certificat e, and select Option s â Certificate details . When you open certificate details, Certificat e management checks the validity of the certificate, and one of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not tru sted - You have not set any application to use the certificate. See Changing the trust settings , p. âÂÂ104â . ⢠Expired certificate - The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet - The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted - The certificate cannot be used . Contact the certificate issuer. Changing the trust settings Before changing any certificate settings , you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the cert ificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options â Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that ca n use the selected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installation : Yes - The certificate is able to ce rtify the origin of new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Interne t : Yes - The certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes - The certificate is able to certify the origin of new Java application. Select Options â Edit trust setting to change the value. Call diverting Icon: When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. 1 To direct your incoming calls to your vo ice mailbox or another phone number, press and select Tools â Settings â Call diver t . For details, contact your service prov ider. 2 Select which calls you want to divert: Voice calls , or Data and video c alls . R0915_en.book Pag e 104 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 105 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 3 Select the desired divert option. For example, If busy to dive rt voice calls when your number is busy or when you reject incoming calls. 4 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several divert options can be active at the same time. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring (network service) Call barring allows you t o restri ct the calls that ca n be made or received with the phone. To change the settings, you n eed the barring password from yo ur service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all ca lls, including data calls. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls still may be possi ble to certain official emergenc y numbers. Network Nokia 6630 can automatically switch betw een the GSM a nd UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Glossary: Roaming agreement - An agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Network mode (shown only if supported by the oper ator) - Select which network will be used. If you select Dual mode , the phone will use the GSM or UMTS network automatically according to the network parameters and th e roaming agreements between the network operators. Contact yo ur network operator for mo re information. Warning: If you set the phone to use only th e GSM network, you will not be able to make any calls, including emergency ca lls , or use other features requiring a network connection, if the selected network is not available. Operator selecti on - Select Automatic to set the phone to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the netw ork from a list of network s. R0915_en.book Pag e 105 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 106 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display - Sele ct On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN ) technology and to activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: - a headset is connected. - a loopset is connected. - headset unavailable, connection to a Bluetooth headset has been lost. Select the enhancement: Headset , Loopset , Bluetooth handsfree , or Car kit . ⢠Select Default profile to set the profile that you want activated each time you co nnect a certain enhancement to your phone. See Profiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . ⢠Select Automatic answer to set the phone to answer an incoming call auto matically after five sec onds. If th e Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled. Voice commands Press and select Tools â Voice com. . Voice commands allows you t o add, delete, and control voice commands in your phone. Voic e commands are recorded the same way as voice tags. See Adding a voice tag to a phone number , p. âÂÂ30â . Adding a voice command to an application You can have only one voice command per application. 1 Select the application to which you want to add a voice command. To add a new application to the list, select Options â New application . 2 Select Options â Add voice command . See Adding a voice tag to a phone number , p. âÂÂ30â . R0915_en.book Pag e 106 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 107 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Application manager Press and select Tools â Manager . You c an install two types of applications and software to your phone: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). Do not download PersonalJava⢠applications to your phone as they cannot be installed. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view, scroll to the installation file, and press to start installation. ⢠Other applications and software s uitable for the Symbian operating system ( ). The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specif ically designed for Nokia 6630. Installation files may be tr ansferred to your phone from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to yo u in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetooth. You can use No kia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your phone or a memory card. If you are using Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, place the file on a memory car d (local disk). Installing applications and software Icons: - .sis application - Java application - application is not fully installed - application is installed on the memory card. Important: Only install applications from sour ces that offer adequate protection against harm ful software. ⢠Before installation, select Options â View detai ls to view information su ch as the application type, version number, and the su pplier or manufacturer of the application. ⢠Before installation, select Options â View certificate to display the security certificate details of the applicatio n. See Certif. management , p. âÂÂ103â . ⢠If you install a file that contai ns an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original instal lation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the ap plic ation again from the original installation file or th e back- up copy. R0915_en.book Pag e 107 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 108 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suite to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you will be asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the se rver. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 Open Application manager, and sc roll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the phone memory or th e memory card, select the application, and press to start the installation. 2 Select Options â Install . Tip! While browsing, you can download an installation file and install it without closing the connection. During installation, the phon e shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Cont inue install ation only if yo u are sure of the origins and contents of the application. Options in the Applications main view: Install , View details , Go to Web addr ess , View certifica te , Send , Remove , App. downloads , View log , Send log , Update , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and press . ⢠To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Options â Go to web address , if available. ⢠To see what software pack ag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options â View log . ⢠T o s e n d y o u r i n s t a l l a t i o n l o g t o a h e l p d e s k s o t h a t t h e y c a n s e e w h a t h a s b e e n i n s t a l l e d or removed, select Options â Send log â Via text message , or Via e-mail (availab le only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Removing applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options â Remove . Press Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only re-install it if you have the original software pac kage or a full back-up of the removed software package. If you re move a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents crea ted with that software. R0915_en.book Pag e 108 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 109 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Note: If another software package depend s on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed softwa re package for details. Application settings ⢠Software installation - S el ec t th e k in d o f s of t wa re yo u w an t in st al le d : On , Signed only, or Off . ⢠Online certif. ch eck - Select if you want Ap plication manager to check the onli ne certificates for an application before installing it. ⢠Default web address - Default address used when checki ng online certificates. Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a network connection to be made to a specific acce ss point for downloading extra data or components. In the Applications main view, scroll to an application, and select Options â Suite settings to change sett ings related to that specific application. Activation keys - handling copyright protected files Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred, or forwarded. Press and select Tool s â Activ. keys to view the digital rig hts activation keys stored in your phone. ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connect ed to one or more media file. ⢠With expired keys ( ) you have run out of time to use the media file, or the time period for using the file is exceeded. To view th e Expired activation keys, press . ⢠To buy more usage time or extend the usage pe riod for a me dia file, select an activation key, and select Options â Activate cont ent . Activation keys cannot be updated if Web service message reception is di sabled. See Settings for Web service messages , p. âÂÂ61â . R0915_en.book Pag e 109 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 110 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To view which keys are not in use at the moment ( N ot used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files co nnect ed to them sa ved in the phone. ⢠To view detailed information such as the validity status and ability to send the file, select an activation key and press . Transfer - transferring content from another phone Press and select Tools â T ransfer to copy contacts, calendar, images, video, and sound clips using Bluetooth from a compatible Se ries 60 phone such as Nokia 6600 and Nokia 7610 to your Nokia 6630. You can use your No kia 6630 without a SIM card. Offline profile is automatically activated when the phone is switched on without a SIM c ard. This allows you to use the SIM card in another phone. Follow the instructions on the screen. To avoid duplicate entries, you can transfer the same type of information, for example contacts, from the other phone to your phone on ly once. If you want to transfer the same information again, you may need to send the Tr ansfer application again to the other device, and install it again. The copying process goes through the following steps: 1 Turn on Bluetooth in your Nokia 6630 and in the other phone. See Bluetooth connection , p. âÂÂ87â . 2 Open the Transfer application in Nokia 6630. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 3 The Data transfer application is sent to the other phone. 4 Install the Transfer application to the other phone. The application will start automatically, and is a dded to the main Menu. 5 The phones need to be pair ed. For further inform ation on pairing, see Sending data using Bluetooth , Pairing, p. âÂÂ88â . 6 Select what content you want to be copied to your Nokia 6630. R0915_en.book Pag e 110 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 111 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 7 Content is copied from the memory and memo ry card of the other phone (if available) to your Nokia 6630. Copying time depends on th e amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel copying and continu e later. Device manager - service provider configuration Press and select Tools â Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your networ k o perator, service provider, or company information management department. These configuration settings may in clude access point settings for data connections and other settings used by differ ent applications in your phone. ⢠To connect to a serv er and receiv e config ur ation settings for your phone, select Start configuration . ⢠To allow or deny receiving of configuratio n settings from a service provider, select Enable config. or Disable config. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct set tings. ⢠Server name - Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID - Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password - Enter a password to identify your phone to the server. ⢠Access point - Select an access point to be us ed when connecting to the server. ⢠Host address - Enter the URL address of the server. ⢠Port - Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name and Password - Enter your user name and password. ⢠Allow config uration - To receive configuration settings from the server, select Yes. R0915_en.book Pag e 111 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 112 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Auto-accept all reqs. . - If you wa nt the phon e to ask for confirmat ion befo re accept ing a configuration from the server, select No . R0915_en.book Pag e 112 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Battery information 113 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Battery information Charging and Discharging Your device is powered by a re chargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cyc les. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short- circuit the batter y. Accidental sh ort-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the batte ry or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter condit ions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Al ways try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Batter y performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidi ty and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow th e device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. R0915_en.book Pag e 113 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION 114 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage ele ctronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, c leaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean th e device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses). ⢠U se only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised ante n nas, modifica tions, or attachments could damage th e device a nd may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggesti ons apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the neares t authorized service facility for service. ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may ca use interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only use enhancements approved by Noki a for use with this device. When the device is on and be ing worn on the body, always use an approved hold er o r carrying case. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmit ting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the manufact urer of the me dical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sens itive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 in. ( 1 5.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid po tential interference with the pacemaker. These re commendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: ⢠a lways keep the device more than 6 in. (15.3 cm) from their pacemake r when the device is switched on; ⢠n ot carry the device in a breast pocket; and ⢠h old the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you have any reason to susp ect that interference is taking place, switch off your device immed iately. R0915_en.book Pag e 114 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION 115 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfe re with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electroni c systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the ma nufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or ins tall the device in a vehicle. Fault y installation or s ervice may be dangerous and may invalidate any warran ty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and ope rating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liqui ds, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment a s the device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless eq uipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deploy ment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installe d and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the w ireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even de ath. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations ar e in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are o ften but not always clearly marked. They include be low deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilitie s, vehicles using lique fied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programme d functions. Because of this, connections in all condit ions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications li ke medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength . Some networks may require that a valid SIM or USIM card is properly inserted in the device. R0915_en.book Pag e 115 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION 116 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Press as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergen cy number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as p ossible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. WARNING! In Offline profile you cannot make calls, except calls to certain emergency numbers, or use features that re quire network coverage. Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERN ATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio tr ansmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIR P). These limit s are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general popula tion. The guidelines we re developed by independent scie ntific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific stud ies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all person s, regard less of age and health . The exposure standard for mobi le devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the inte rnational guidelines is 2.0 W/ kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certif ied power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is becaus e the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the pow er required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.83 W/kg. This device meets RF exposure gu idelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a c arry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn ope ration, it should not contain metal and should positio n the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are follow ed until the transmission is completed. * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged ov er ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a s ubstantial margin of safety t o give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurem ents. SAR values may vary depending on national repor ting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product inform ation at www.nokia.com. R0915_en.book Pag e 116 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
117 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Index A access points 97 settings 99 activation keys 109 alarms alarm clock 16 calendar alarms 63 applications, Java 107 B Bluetooth connecting two devices, pairing 88 connection requests 88 connection status indicators 89 device address 88 device icons 88 factory set passcode 88 headset 106 pairing requests 88 pairing, glossary explanation 88 passcode, glossary explanation 88 switching off 90 bookmark, glossary explanation 67 brightness display 96 setting in camera 33 C cache clearing 71 calendar alarm 63 sending entries 63 stopping a calendar alarm 63 synchronising PC Suite 64 call register see log calls dialled numbers 25 duration 25 international 21 received 25 settings 96 settings for call divert 104 transferring 24 camera adjusting brightness 33 adjusting contrast 33 night mode 33 saving video clips 35 self-timer 34 sending images 33 sequence mode 34 video recorder settings 36 CD-ROM 90 certificates 103 chat see instant messaging clear screen See standby mode clock alarm 16 settings 16 snooze 16 codes 101 lock code PIN code 101 PIN2 code 101 computer connections 90 conference call 23 connection settings 97 contact c ards inserting pictures 28 storing DTMF tones 24 contrast setting in camera 33 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 29 text 49 copyright protection R0915_en.book Pag e 117 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
118 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. see activation keys cutting text 49 D data connections details 91 ending 91 indicators 15 date settings 101 digital rights management, DRM see activation keys DNS, domain name service, glossary explanation 100 E editing videos 38 adding effects 38 adding sound clips 38 adding transitions 38 custom video clips 38 e-mail 49 offline 56 opening 55 remote mailbox 53 retrieving from mailbox 54 settings 59 viewing attachments 55 F file formats JAD file JAR file 108 RealOne Player 42 SIS file 107 file manager 17 fixed dialling 102 G gallery 36 H handsfree see loudspeake r headset settings 106 I indicators 15 instant messaging 80 blocking 82 connectin g to a server 80 groups 84 individual conversations 83 recording the messages 83 sending a private message 82 sending instant messages 82 user ID, glossary explanation 83 internet access points (IAP) See access points IP address, glossary explanation 100 J Java See applications, Java L lock code 101 log erasing contents 26 filtering 26 log duration 26 loopset settings 106 loudspeaker 17 activating 17 turning off 17 M mailbox 53 media files fast forward 43 file formats 42 mute sound 43 rewind 43 memory clearing memory 25 viewing memory consumption 18 memory card 19 memory card adapter see the Quick Start Guide, reduced- size MultiMediaCard adapter menu rearranging 12 messaging e-mail 49 multimedia message 49 text message 49 R0915_en.book Pag e 118 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
119 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. movies, muvees custom muvees 40 quick muvees 40 multimedia messages 49 mute sound 43 my home city 17 P packet data connections 91 GPRS, glossary explanation 98 settings 100 pasting text 49 PC connections via Bluetooth or USB cable 90 PC Suite calendar data 64 synchronisation 90 transfering images to a PC 37 viewing phone memory data 18 personalisation 13 PIN code 101 R recording video 36 recording voice tags 30, 106 reminder See calendar, alarm remote mailbox 53 resolution, glossary explanation 34 ringing tones adding a personal ringing tone 29 receiving in a text message 53 removing a personal ringing tone 30 RSMMC, reduced-size MMC see the Quick Start Guide S security code see lock code sending calendar entries 63 contact cards, business cards 29 images 33 video clips 39 service commands 46 settings access codes 101 access points 99 Bluetooth 87 calendar 64 call barring 105 call diverting 104 certificates 103 data connections 97 date and time 101 display 96 headset 106 IM settings 80, 81, 86 language 95 lock code 101 loopset 106 original settings 95 personalising the phone 11 PIN code 101 screen saver 96 UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 wallet 78 wallet code 101 shortcuts camera 33 see the Quick Start Guide web connection 67 SIM card copying names and numbers to phone 29 messages 57 names and numbers 29 SIS file 107 SMS centre, short message service centre 57 snooze alarm clo ck 16 calendar alarm 63 software transferring a file to your device 107 sound clips 36 sounds muting a ringing to ne 23 personalising 12 recording sounds 41 R0915_en.book Pag e 119 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
120 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. speed dialling 22 standby mode 11 synchronisation 92 T text messag e 49 text message service centre adding new 57 thumbnail images in a contact ca rd 28 time settings 101 transfering content from another phone 110 U UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 USB cable 90 USIM card see glossary explanation in the Quick Start Guide USSD commands 46 V video call 21 answering 24 rejecting 24 video clips 36 video player See RealOne Player video recorder see camera voice dialling 30, 106 voice mailbox 21 changing the phone number 21 diverting calls to voice mailbox 104 voice messages 21 voice tags 30, 106 adding 30, 106 making calls 31 volume control 17 during a call 21 loudspeaker 17 W wallet 75 entering the wallet code 76 resetting wallet code 78 settings 78 storing card details 76 viewing ticket details 78 wallet code 76, 101 web access points, see access points R0915_en.book Pag e 120 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibility that the product RM-1 is in conformity wi th the provisions of the following Council Direct ive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://ww w.nokia.com/ phones/declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2004-2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, d istribution or stor age of part or all of the contents in th is document in any form without the prior w ritten permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Conne cting People, and Pop-Port are trademarks or registere d trademarks of Nokia Corporation. O ther product and co mpany na mes mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradename s of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998-200(4). Symbian and Symbian OS are tr ademarks of Sym bian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registe red trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Bluetooth is a registered tradem ark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or m ore U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 51 26739, 5146221, and 5414425. Ot her patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other p atents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2004. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserve d. USE OF THIS PRODU CT IN ANY MANNER THAT C OMPLIES WITH THE M PEG-4 VISUAL STAND ARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCE PT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) D ATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERA TED BY AND OBTAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CO NSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPRISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSON AL USE ONLY; AND (B) O THER USES SPECIFICALL Y AND SEPARATELY LICE NSED BY MPEG LA, L.L.C. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reser ves th e right to make changes and impr ovements to any of the prod ucts described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or i ndirect damage s howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. Except as requ ired by appl icable law, no warr ant ies of any kind, either exp ress or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchant ability and fitness for a particul ar purpose , are made in relation to the accuracy, reliabili ty or contents of this document. Nokia re serves the right to revise this document or w ith draw it at any time without prior notice The availability of particular product s may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Export Controls This device may contain commodities, technology or soft ware subje ct to export laws and r egulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrar y to law is prohibited. FCC INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE R0915_en.book Pag e 2 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, wh en using a telephone in close proximit y to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assis tance, cont act yo ur local service facility. This device complies with par t 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two con ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful i nterference, and (2) this device must accept any int erference received, including interfere nce that may cause undesired oper ation. ISSUE 3 EN, 9234401 R0915_en.book Pag e 3 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
4 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents FOR YOUR SAFETY .......................... .......... 8 Personalising your phone . ....................... 11 Profiles - setting tones ............. ............ ........... ........... ....... 12 Offline profile .................. ........... ........... ............ ......... .. 12 Themes - the look of your phone .......... ............ ........... .. 13 Your phone ........................ ....................... 15 Essential indicators.. ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ....... 15 Clock ........ ........... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ......... 16 Clock settings ...... .......... ........... ........... ......... ............ .... 16 World clock ................. ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... 17 Volume control and built-in lou dspeaker ........... ......... 17 File manager - ma naging memory............... ........... ....... 17 Viewing memory consumption....................... ......... 18 Memory low - freeing memory ...................... ......... 18 Memory card tool .......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... 19 Formatting a memory card ................ ............ ........... 20 Making calls ..................................... ........21 Making a voice call.. ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ .... 21 Making a video call...... ........... ......... ........... ............ .... 21 Speed dialling a phone number ... ........... ......... ....... 22 Making a conferenc e call (network service) ........ 23 Answering or rejecting a c all....................... ........... ......... 23 Answering or rejecting a video ca ll............ ............ 24 Call waiting (netwo rk service) ........... ............ .......... 24 Options during a call ............... ........... ............ ......... ... 24 Log ................. ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ... 25 Recent calls ........ ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ...... 25 Call duration ....... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ...... 25 Packet data .................. ............ ......... ........... ......... ........ 26 Monitoring all communication events ...... ............ 26 Contacts (Phonebook) ............................. 28 Saving names and numbers ........ ........... ........... ............ ... 28 Using default numbers and a ddresses......... .......... 28 Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory ........... ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... .......... 29 SIM directory and other SIM services ................... 29 Adding ringing tones for contacts ........................... ...... 29 Voice dialling .......... ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ......... . 30 Adding a voice t ag to a phone number ................ 30 Making a call by saying a voice tag.................... ... 31 Creating contact groups ................ ......... ........... ............ ... 31 Removing members from a group ......... .............. ... 31 Camera and Gallery .................. ............... 32 Camera .................. ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... ...... 32 Taking pictures ............... ........... ........... ......... ............ ... 32 R0915_en.book Pag e 4 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
5 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Taking pictures in a sequence .................... ........... ...34 You in the picture - s elf-timer ...................... ..........34 Adjusting came ra settings........ ............ ......... ........... .34 Recording videos .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... . 35 Adjusting video rec order settings ................. ..........36 Gallery.............. ........... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... .36 Viewing images ................ ........... ............ ........... ......... .37 Media .................. ..................................... 38 Video editor ............... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ........38 Editing video, sound, and tran sitions .................... .38 Movie director ............. ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ .....40 Settings............... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... .41 Image mgr. ............ ........... ......... ........... .......... ........... ......... ...41 Recorder ..... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ......... ........41 RealPlayer⢠...... ............ .................................................... ..... 41 Playing video or sound clips .... .......... .................. .....42 Streaming content over the air .............. .............. ...42 Receiving Rea lPlayer settings ........... ........... ........... .43 Messaging .................................. .............. 45 Writing text ........... ......... ........... ........... .......... ........... ......... ...46 Traditional text input................. ............ ........... ..........46 Predictive text input - Dictionary ............. ........... ...47 Copying text to clipboard ......... .......... .................. .....49 Writing and sending messages ................. ........... ............49 Receiving MMS and e -mail settings .......... ........... . 51 Inbox - rece iving messages .................... ......... ............ .....51 Receiving multimedia mess ages ................... .......... 52 Receiving logos, tones, busi ness cards, calendar entries, and settings ......... ............ ........... ........... ........ 52 Receiving Web service mes sages .............. ........... ... 53 My folders ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ..... 53 Mailbox ........... ........... .................................. ............ ......... ..... 53 Opening the mailbox .... ........... ..................... ......... ..... 54 Retrieving e-mail message s............ ............ ........... ... 54 Deleting e-mail messa ges ...... ............ ......... ........... ... 55 Disconnecting from the mailbox.. .......... ............ ..... 56 Outbox - messages waiting to be sent ........... ............. . 56 Viewing messag es on a SIM card .................. ............ ..... 57 Messaging settings ...... ........... ........... .......... ........... ......... ... 57 Settings for text mes sages ........... ........... ............ ..... 57 Settings for multimedia messages .................... ..... 58 Settings for e-mail ............... ........... ........... ............ ..... 59 Settings for Web service me ssages .............. .......... 61 Settings for cell broadcast (network service) .. .... 61 Other settings ............ ......... ............ ........... ......... .......... 62 Calendar and To-do ................................ 63 Calendar - creatin g calendar entries............... ............. . 63 Calendar views ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ..... 64 Setting a calendar ala rm ............... ........... ............ ..... 64 Calendar settings ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ... 65 To-do - task list ................ ......... ............ ........... ......... .......... 65 Web ..................... ..................................... 66 R0915_en.book Pag e 5 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
6 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Accessing the We b ......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... 66 Receiving browser settings............ ........... ............ .... 66 Keying in the settings manually ................ ............. 66 Bookmarks view.......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ .... 67 Adding bookmarks manually ....... ...................... ....... 67 Sending bookmarks............ ............ ........... ......... ......... 68 Making a connection ............ ........... ........... ............ ........... 68 Connection security.................. ........... ............ ........... 68 Browsing................. ........... ......... ......... ........... .......... ......... .... 69 Viewing saved pages .................. ............ ......... ........... 70 Downloading and purchasing items .......... ........... ......... 70 Ending a connection ............... ........... ............ ......... ........... 71 Emptying the cache .................... ............ ........... ......... 71 Settings for Web ........... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... 71 Organiser ............ ...................................... 73 Calculator .......... ......... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... 73 Calculating percenta ges .......... ........... .......... ........... .. 73 Notes ................ ........... ......... ............ ......... ......... ........... ......... 73 Go to - adding shortcuts ............ ...................... ......... ....... 74 Deleting a shortcut ............ ......... ............ ........... ......... 74 Converter - converting me asures ...................... ........... .. 74 Setting a base currency an d exchange rates ...... 75 Wallet ....... ......... ........... .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ....... 75 Creating a walle t code.................... ......... ........... ....... 76 Storing personal card details ................... ............ .... 76 Creating person al notes ................... ............ ........... .. 77 Creating a wallet profile .................... ............ ........... 77 Viewing ticket details............ ........... ........... ............ ... 78 Wallet settings ............ ............ ......... ........... ........... ...... 78 Resetting the walle t and wallet code ................ ... 78 IM - Instant Messaging (chat) ............... 80 Receiving IM sett ings ....... ............ ......... ........... ........... ...... 80 Connecting to an IM server ............ ........... ............ .......... 80 Modifying your IM settings ......... ...................... ......... ...... 81 Searching for IM groups and users ............. ........... ........ 81 Joining and leavin g an IM group .......... .............. ........... . 82 Chatting .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ......... ............ ......... . 82 Recording chats ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ... 83 Viewing and starting conve rsations ...................... ........ 83 IM contacts ........ ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... ........ 84 Managing IM groups................ ........... ......... ............ .......... 84 Administrating an IM group ......... ........... .................. ...... 85 Creating a new IM group ....... ......... ........... ............ ... 85 Adding and removing group members ...... ........... . 85 Chat server s ettings........... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........ 86 Connectivity ....... ...................................... 87 Bluetoot h connection .............. ........... ............ ......... .......... 87 Bluetooth settings........... ........... ........... .......... ........... . 87 Sending data using Bluetooth .................. ............ ... 88 Pairing devices ............ ............ ........... ........... ............ ... 89 Receiving data us ing Bluetooth ...... ............ ........... . 90 Switching off Bluet ooth .................. ......... ........... ...... 90 PC connections - usin g Bluetooth or USB ................... 90 R0915_en.book Pag e 6 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
7 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Using the CD-ROM ................... ............ ........... ......... ... 90 Using your phone as a modem ... .......... ........... ........90 Connection manager ................ ......... ............ ........... ..........91 Viewing data connection deta ils ............... ............. . 91 Sync - remote synchronisat ion....... ............ ........... ..........92 Creating a new synchronisation profile ... ............. 92 Synchronising data ........ ........... ............ ........... ........... . 93 Tools ........................................... .............. 95 Settings ......... ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ......... .95 Phone settings .................. ........... .......... ........... ........... .95 Call settings..................... ......... ........... ......... ............ .....96 Connection settings ................. ............ ........... ......... ...97 Date and time ............ ............ ........... ......... ........... ..... 101 Security ............. ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ....... 101 Call diverting .......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... 104 Call barring (network s ervice) ................. ............ .. 105 Network ..... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ..... 105 Enhancement s ettings .................. ........... ........... ..... 106 Voice commands ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ......106 Adding a voice command to an application ......106 Application manager ....... ............ ............................... ......107 Installing applications and so ftware ......... ..........107 Removing applications and soft ware ........ ..........108 Application settings ...... ........... ........................... ......109 Activation keys - handling c opyright protected files .... 109 Transfer - transferring content from another phone ..... 110 Device manager - service provider configuration.... 111 Server profile settings ........... ........... ............ ........... .111 Battery information .............................. 113 Charging and Discharging .................... ........... ............ ...113 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ...... ............ 113 ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION .. 114 Index 117 R0915_en.book Pag e 7 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
8 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. FOR YOUR SAFETY Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further inf ormation. SWITCH ON SA FELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY C OMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your han ds free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving sh ould be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical eq uipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wir eless phones can ca use interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use the phone at a refuelling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Us e only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIE D SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTE RIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a written record of all important information. CONNECTING TO OTHE R PHONES When connecting to any other phone, rea d its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. R0915_en.book Pag e 8 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
9 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. EMERGENCY CA LLS Ensure the phone function of the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed to clear the display and retu rn to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. ABOUT YOUR DEVICE The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900/1800/19 00, and UMTS 2000 network. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Network Services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wi reless network to function. These Network Services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize Network Services. Your service provid er may need to gi ve you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some ne tworks may have limitations that affect how you can use Network Services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language- dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Contact your service provider for more information. This wireless device is a 3G PP GSM Release 99 terminal supporting GPRS service, and is designed to support also Release 97 GPRS networks. However, there may be some compatibility issues when used in some Release 97 GP RS networks. For mo re informat ion, contact your serv ice provider. This device supports WAP 2. 0 protoc ols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e- mail and content downloading via browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Check the model number of any charger before use with this phone. This phone is in tended for use when supplied with power from ACP-12 an d LCH-12. R0915_en.book Pag e 9 Tuesday, February 8, 200 5 11:46 AM
10 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Your phone and its enhancements may contain smal l parts. Keep them out of reach of small ch ildren. R0915_en.book Pag e 10 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 11 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Personalising your phone Note: Your service provider/network operator may have requested a different order for menu items or the inclusion of differ ent icons in the phone menu. Contact your service provider/network operator or Nokia Customer Care for assistance with any features that differ f rom th ose described in this guide. ⢠To change the standby mode background image, or w ha t is sho wn in t he s cre en s ave r, see Themes - the look of your phone , p. âÂÂ13â . ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see P rofiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . ⢠To change shortcuts assigned for t he selection keys in the standby mod e, select Tools â Settings â Phone â Standby mode â Left selection key or Right se lection key . ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different presses of the Scroll key in the standby mode, see Standby mode , p. âÂÂ96â . ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Clock â Options â Settings . Scroll to Clock ty pe and select Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the Clock alarm tone, select Clock â Options â Settings . Scroll to Clock Alarm tone and select a tone. ⢠To change the Ca lendar alarm ton e, select Calendar â Op tions â Settin gs . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or animation, select Tools â Sett ings â Phone â General â Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ringing tone to a contact, select Contacts . See p. âÂÂ28â . ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, pr ess a numbered key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and pres s . Select a contact. To change the speed dialling status (pressing and holding a sp eed dial key in the standb y mode) to Off , select Tools â Settings â Ca ll â Speed dialling . Fig. 1 Standby mode with a new background image, a new selection key shortcut, UMTS networ k and Bluetooth activated. R0915_en.book Pag e 11 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 12 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To rearrange the main Menu, in the main Men u, select Options â Move , Mo ve to folder , or New folder . You ca n move less used applications into folders, and pla ce applications that you use more often into the main Menu. Profiles - setting tones To set and cust omise the ringin g tones, mess ag e alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press and select Profiles . You can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in the standby mode. If the General profile is in use, only the current date is shown. ⢠To change the profile, press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate and press OK . Tip! When you are choosing a tone, Tone downloads opens a lis t of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a W eb page to download tones. ⢠To modify a profile, select Profiles . Scroll to the profile and select Options â Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the c h o i c e s . T o n e s s t o r e d o n t h e m e m o r y c a r d are indicated with . You can scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. Press any ke y to stop the sound. ⢠To create a new profile, select Options â Create ne w . Offline profile Offline profile lets you use the phone without co nnecting to the wireless networ k. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned o ff, as indicated by in the signal strength indicato r. All wireless phone si gnals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send mess ages, they are p laced in Outbox to be sent later. R0915_en.book Pag e 12 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 13 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! For information on how to change the alert tone for Calendar or Clock, see Personalising your phone , p. âÂÂ11â . Warning: In Offline profile you cannot ma ke calls, except calls to cert ain emergency numbers, or use features that require network coverage. To make calls, change the profile to activate the phone fu nction. If the device has been locked, you must enter the unlock code before you can change the profile and make calls. Warning: Your device must be switched on to us e the offline profile. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, select another profile and select Options â Activate . Press Yes . The phone re-enables wireless transmissions (pro viding there is sufficient signal strength). If Bluetooth was activated before entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. Bluetooth will automatically be reactivated aft e r leaving the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 89. Themes - the look of your phone To change the look of your phone display, su ch as the wallpaper, colo ur palette, and icons, press and select Tools â Themes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other th emes or select images from Gallery to personalise themes further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the phone. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card without the memory card, save the themes in the phone memory f irst. Options in the Themes main view: Preview / Th eme downloads , Apply , Edit , Copy to mem. card , Copy to phone mem. , Help , and Exit . ⢠To activate a theme, sc roll to it and select Options â Apply . ⢠To preview a theme, scroll to it, and select Options â Preview . ⢠To edit themes, scroll to a theme and select Options â Edit to c hange the following options: ⢠Wallpaper - the image to be shown as a back ground image in the standby mode. ⢠Colour palette - the colours used on the screen. R0915_en.book Pag e 13 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Personalising your phone 14 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Screen saver - the screen saver type: date and time, or a text you have writ ten yourself. See a lso Screen saver ti meout settings, p. âÂÂ96â . ⢠Image in 'Go to' - the background image for the Go to application. ⢠To restore the selected theme back to its original settings, selec t Option s â Restore orig. theme when you are editing a theme. R0915_en.book Pag e 14 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 15 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Your phone Essential indicators - The phone is being used in a GSM network. (network service) - The phone is being used in a UMTS network. See Network , p. âÂÂ105â . - You have received one or several messages to the Inbox folder in Messaging. - There are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See p. âÂÂ56â . and - You have missed calls. See Recent calls , p.âÂÂ25â . - Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , IM alert tone , and E-mail ale rt tone are set to Off . See Profiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . - The phone keypad is locked. See the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂKeypad lock (Keyguard)âÂÂ. - You have an ac tive alarm. See Clock , p. âÂÂ1 6â . - The second phone line is being used. See Li ne in use , p. âÂÂ97â . - All calls to t he phone are diverted to another number. If you have two phon e lines, the divert indicator for the first lin e is and for the second . - A headset is connected to the phone. - A loopset is connected to the phone. - The connection to a Bluetooth head set has been lost. - A data call is active. - A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is available. - A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is active. - Shown when the packet data connection is on hold. These icons a re shown instea d of the signal str ength indicator (shown in the top left corner in the standby mode). See Packet data co nnections in GSM and UMTS networks , p. âÂÂ98â . - An UMTS packet data connection is available. - An UMTS packet data connection is active. - An UMTS packet data connection is on hold. - Bluetooth is active. - Data is being transmit ted using Bluetooth. See Bluetooth connection , p. âÂÂ87â . - USB connection is active. R0915_en.book Pag e 15 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 16 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Clock Options in Clock: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Press and select Clock . ⢠To set a ne w alarm, select Option s â Set alarm . Enter the alarm time, and press OK . When the alarm is active, the indicator is shown. ⢠To turn off the alarm, press Stop . When the alarm tone sounds, press any key or Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume. You can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached whi le the device is switched off, the device switch es itself on and starts soun ding the alarm ton e. If you press Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Press No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not press Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. ⢠To cancel an alarm, select Cloc k â Options â Remove alarm . Clock settings ⢠To chang e the clo ck sett ings, se lect Options â Setting s in Clock. ⢠To change the cl ock shown in the st andby mode, scroll down and select Clock t ype â Analogue or Digital . ⢠To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zo ne information to your phone (network service), scroll down and select Auto time update . For the Auto time update setting to take effect, the phone restarts. ⢠To change the alarm tone, scroll down and select Clock ala rm tone . ⢠To change the daylight saving time status, scroll down and select Daylight-sav ing . Select On to add one hour to the My home city time. See My home city , p. âÂÂ17â . When the Daylight-saving is active, the indicator is shown in the Clock main view. R0915_en.book Pag e 16 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 17 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. World clock Open Clock and press to open the World clock vi ew. In the World clock view you can view the time in different cities. ⢠To add cities to the list, select Options â Add city . Enter the first letters of the city name. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a city. You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. ⢠To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options â My home city . The city is displayed in the Clock main view and the ti me in your phone is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume control and built-in loudspeaker ⢠To increase or decrease the volume level, wh en you ha ve an active call or ar e listening to a sound, pres s or , respecti vely. The built-in loudspeaker al lows you to speak an d listen to the phone from a short distance without having to hold th e phone to your ea r, for example, hav ing it on a table nearby . Sound applications use th e loudspeaker by default. ⢠To locate the loudspeaker, see the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂKeys and partsâÂÂ. ⢠To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and press . Important: Do not hold the phone near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. ⢠To turn off the loudspea ker, when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press . File manager - managing memory Many features of the phone use memory to store data. Th ese featur es include contacts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded Fig. 2 Navigation bar shows the speaker in use: Handset or Loudsp. . R0915_en.book Pag e 17 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 18 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. applications. The free memory available depends on how muc h data is already saved in t he phone memory. You can use a memory ca rd as extra sto rage spac e. Memo ry cards ar e re-writable, so you can delete an d save data on a memory card. ⢠To browse files and folders in the phone memory or on a memo ry card (if inse rted), press and select Organiser â File mgr. . The phone memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). ⢠To move or copy files to a folder, press and at th e same time to mark a file , and select Option s â Move to folder or Copy to folder . Icons in File manager: - folder, - folder that has a subfolder. ⢠To find a file, se lect Options â Find , select the memory from which to search, and enter a search text that ma tches the file name. Viewing memory consumption ⢠To view what types of data you have in the phone and how much memory the different data types consume, select Opt ions â Memory details . Sc roll down to Free memory to view the amount of free memory in the phone. ⢠To view the amount of free memory on the memory card, if you have a card inser t ed in the phone, press to open the memory card view, and select Options â Memory details . See Fig. 3, p. âÂÂ19â . Tip! You can use Nokia Phone Browser available in Noki a PC Suite to view the different memories in your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Memory low - freeing memory The phone notifies you if the phone memory or memory card memory is getting low. ⢠To free phone memory, tra nsfer data to a memory card in the File manager. Mark files to be moved, and select Move to fo lder , select memory card, and a folder. ⢠To remove data to free memory, use the File manager application, or go to the respective ap plication. For example, you can remove: ⢠messages from the In box, Drafts, and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠retrieved e-mail messages from th e phone memory ⢠saved Web pages R0915_en.book Pag e 18 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 19 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠contact information â¢c a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠downloaded applications, see also Application manager , p. âÂÂ107â . ⢠any other data that you no longer need. Memory card tool Note: This device uses Reduced Size Dual Vo ltage (1.8/3V) MultiMediaCard (MMC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage MMCs. Check the compatibility of an MMC with its manufacturer or provider. Press and select Organiser â Memory . You can use a memory card as ex tra storage space. See Quick Start Guide, âÂÂInserting the memory cardâÂÂ. You can also back up information from phone memory and rest ore the information to the phone later. You cannot use the memory card if the d oor of the memory card slot is open. Options in Memory card: Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Memory details , Help , and Exit . Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Do not open the memory card slot door in th e middle of an operation. Opening the slot door may damage the memory card as well as the de vice, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. Use only compatible Multimedia cards (MMC) with this device. Ot her memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompat ible memory ca rd may damage the memory car d as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. ⢠To backup information from phone memory to a memory card, select Options â Backup phone mem. . ⢠To restore information from the memory card to the phone memory, select Options â Restore from card . Fig. 3 Memory consumption of the memory c ard. R0915_en.book Pag e 19 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Your phone 20 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Formatting a memory card When a memory card is formatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Tip! To rename a memory card, go to Memory card and select Options â Memory card name. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted an d others requ ire formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card befo re you can use it. To format a memory card, select Options â Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When formatting is complete, ente r a name for the memory ca rd, and press OK . R0915_en.book Pag e 20 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 21 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Making calls Making a voice call Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press or . 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, press twice for the character (repla ces the international access code), and enter the coun try code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Pres s to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press and select Tools â Voice mail and select Options â Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider) and press OK . Pressing will always end a call, even if another application is active. Making a call from the Contacts application - Pres s and sele ct Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter th e first letters of the name to the Sea rch field. Matchi ng contacts are listed. Press to call. Select the call type Voic e call. Calling your voice mailbox (network servi ce) - To call your voice mailbox, press and hold in the standby mode. See also Call diverting , p. âÂÂ104â . Calling a recently dialled numb er - In the standby mode, pres s to access a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to ca ll. Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the numb er. Making a video call When you make a video call, you can see a re al-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. See Figure 4. The video image captured by the camera in your phone will be shown to the video call recipient. R0915_en.book Pag e 21 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 22 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! With Nokia Video Call Stand PT-8, you can view your own image and the other callerâÂÂs image from your phon e display during a video call. To be ab le t o m ak e a vi d eo ca ll , y ou ne e d t o h av e a US I M c ar d a n d b e in t he co ve ra g e o f a UMTS network. For availability of and subscr iption to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible m obile phone or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made w hile there is anot her voice, video, or data call active. 1 To start a video call, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or go to Contacts, and select a contact. Then select Options â Call â Video call . 2 Starting a video call may take a while. A note Wai ting for image is shown. If the call is not successful, for example, vi deo calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible, you w i l l b e a sk e d if y o u w a n t to t r y a n o rm a l call or send a message instead. 3 The video call is active when you can see tw o video images and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you may see a still image or no image at all. You will hear the sound. Icons: - the vi deo call recipient has denied v ideo sending from his device. - you have denied video sen ding from your phone. Select Enable / Disable : Sending video , Se nding audio or Sending audio & video if you want to change between showing video or hearing only sound. Select Zoom in or Zoom out ; or press and to zoom your own image. Zoom indicator is shown on the top of the display. 4 To end the video call, press . Note: Even if you have denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video call. Check the pric ing wi th your network op erator or service provider. Tip! To speed dial a number by pressing and holding the key, press and select Tools â Settings â Call and set Speed dialling â On . Speed dialling a phone number ⢠To assign a phone number to one of th e speed dialling keys ( - ), press and select Tools â Speed dial . is reserved for the voice mailbox. ⢠To call: In standby mode, press the speed dial key an d . Fig. 4 Making a video call. R0915_en.book Pag e 22 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 23 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Making a conference call (network service) 1 Make a call to the fir st particip ant. 2 To make a call to anothe r participant, select Options â New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, join the first participant in the conf erence call. Select Options â Conference . ⢠To add a n ew person t o the call, repeat step 2, and select Optio ns â Conference â Add to conference . The phone supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. ⢠To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options â Conferen ce â Private . Select a participant and press Private . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. The ot her part icipants can still continue the conference call. Once you have finished the private conversation, select Options â Add to conference to return to the conference call. ⢠To drop a participant, select Options â Conference â Drop participant , sc roll to the participant, and press Drop . 4 To end the active confer ence call, press . Answering or rejecting a call ⢠To answer the call, press . ⢠To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, press Silenc e . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the phone, you can answer and end a ca ll by pressing the headset key. ⢠If you do not want to answer a call, press to reject it. The caller will hear a line busy tone. If you have activated the Call divert â If busy function to divert cal ls, rejecting an incoming call will also dive rt the call. See Call diverting , p. âÂÂ104â . When you reject an incoming call, you ca n also send a t ext message to the caller informing why you could not answer the call. Select Options â Send text message . You can edit the text before sending it. See also Reject call with SMS , p. âÂÂ9 6â . R0915_en.book Pag e 23 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 24 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Answering or rejecting a video call When a video call arrives, you can see the icon . 1 Press to answer the vid eo call. Allow video image to be sent to call er? is show n. If you select Yes , the image being captured by the ca mera in your phone is shown to the caller. If you sele ct No , video s ending is not activated, and a still image or no image is shown. You will hear the sound. See Tools , Image in video call , p. âÂÂ97â . 2 To end the video call, press . Call waiting (network service) You can answer a call while you have another ca ll in progress if you ha ve activated the Call waiting function in Tools â Settings â Cal l â Call waitin g (see also p. âÂÂ24â ). Tip! To change the phone tones for different environments and events, for example, when you want your phone to be silent, see Profiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . ⢠To answer the waiting call, press . The firs t call is put on hold. ⢠To switch between the two calls, press Swap . Select Options â Transfer to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an acti ve call and to discon nect yourself from the calls. To end the active call, pr ess . To end both calls, select Option s â End all calls . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use du ring a call are network services. Press Options during a call for some of t he following options: Mute or Unmute , Answer , Reject, Swap, Hold or Unhol d , Activate handset , Activate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree ( if a compatible Bluetooth headset is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conferen ce , and Transfer . Select: Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact car d. ⢠Replace - to end a n active call and replac e it by ans wering the waiting call. ⢠Send MMS (in UMTS networks only) - to send an image or a video in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call . You ca n edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press to send the file to a compatible device (network service). R0915_en.book Pag e 24 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 25 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Send DTMF - to send DTMF tone strings, for example, a pass word. Enter the D TMF string or search for it in Cont acts. To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Press OK to send the tone. Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, press and select Log â Recent calls . The phone registers missed and re ceived calls only if the network supports these functions, the phone is switched on, and within the networkâÂÂs service area. Tip! When you see a note in standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . Erasing recent call lists - To clear all recent call lis ts, select Options â Clear recent calls in the Recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and select Options â Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press and select Log â Call duration. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service prov ider may vary, depending on network features, round ing off for billing, and so forth. Clearing call duration timers - Sele ct Options â Clear timers . For this you need the lock code, see Security , Phone and SIM , p. âÂÂ101â . R0915_en.book Pag e 25 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 26 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press and select Log â Packet data . For example, you may be char ged for your pac ket data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Icons: - incoming, - outgoing, and - missed communication events. Monitoring all communication events To monitor all voice and video calls, text mess ages, or data connections registered by the phone, press and select Log , and press to open the general log. See Fig. 5. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filt er the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact card s based on the log information. Tip! To vi ew a li st of sent messages, press and select Messagin g â Sent . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as on e communication event. Conn ections to yo ur mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or Web page s are shown as packet data connections. Note: When sending messages, y our phone may display the word â Se nt âÂÂ. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message centre number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destinat ion. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. ⢠To filter the log, select Options â Filter . Scroll to a filter and press Select . ⢠To erase the contents of the log, Recent ca lls register, and Messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options â Clear log . Press Yes to confirm. â¢T o s e t t h e Log duration , go to Options â Settings â Log duration . The log events remain in the phone memory for a set number of days after wh ich they are automatically erased to fr ee memory. If you select No log , all the log cont ents, Recent calls register, and Messaging deliver y reports are permanently deleted. Fig. 5 General log of communication events. R0915_en.book Pag e 26 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Making calls 27 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Packet data counter and connection tim er : To view how much data, measured in kilobytes, has been transferred and how long a c ertain packet data connection has las ted, scroll to an inc oming or outgoing event indic ated by Pack. , and select Opti ons â View details . R0915_en.book Pag e 27 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 28 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) Options in the Contacts dir ectory: Open , Call , Create message , New contact , Open conver sation , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group (shown if you have created a group), Belongs to groups (shown if you have created a group), Mark/Unmark, Copy , SIM contacts , Go to web address , Send, Contacts info , Settings, Help , and Exit . Press and select Contacts . In C ontacts you can add a personal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnail im age to a contac t card. You ca n also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. You can add received contact information (business cards) to Co ntacts. See Receiving logos, to nes, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compat ible devices. Saving names and numbers 1 Select Options â New contact. 2 Fill in the fields th at you want, and pre ss Done . ⢠To edit contact cards i n Contacts, scroll to the contac t card you want to edit, and select Options â Edit . ⢠To delete a contact card in Contacts, sele ct a card, and press . To delete several contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Options when editing a contact card: Add thumbnail , Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . ⢠To attach a small thum bnail image to a contact card, op en the contact card and select Options â Edit . Then select Options â Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Using default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact into a certain number or address. 1 In Contacts, select a contact, and press . R0915_en.book Pag e 28 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 29 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! You can add and edit contact cards using Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplie d in the sales package. 2 Select Opti ons â Defaults . 3 Select a de fault to which you want to add a number or an address, and press Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you wa nt to set as a defaul t, and press Select . The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory Tip! To send contact information, select the card you want to send. Select Options â Send â Via text message , Via multimedia or Via Blueto oth . See the Messaging chapter, and Sending data using Bluetooth , p. âÂÂ88â . ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SIM ca rd to your phone, press and select Contacts â Options â SIM contacts â SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy, and select Options â Copy to Contacts . ⢠To copy a telephone, fax, or pager number from Contacts to your SIM card, select Contacts, and open a contact card. Scroll to the number, and select Options â Copy to SIM direct. . SIM directory and other SIM services Note: For availability, rates, and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor (network operator, service provider or other vendor). Press and select Contacts â Options â SIM contacts â SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to Contacts, and you can make calls. Adding ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, th e phone plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognises it). R0915_en.book Pag e 29 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 30 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dialling keys to eight phone numbers. See âÂÂSpeed dialling a phone numberâ , p.âÂÂ22â . 1 Press to open a contact card or go to th e Groups list and select a contact group. 2 Select Options â Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Voice dialling You can make a ph one call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken words can be a voice tag. Tip! You can synchronis e your cont acts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Before using voice tags , note that: ⢠Voice tags are not language-dependent. Th ey are dependent on the speaker 's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. R e c o r d v o i c e t a g s a n d use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. Example: You can use a personâÂÂs name as a voice tag (for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs mobileâÂÂ. Adding a voice tag to a phone number You can have only one voice tag per contact ca rd. You can add a voice tag to up to 50 phone numbers. 1 In Contacts, open the contact card to which you want t o add a voice tag. Tip! To vi ew a li st of voice tags you have defined, select Options â Contacts info â Voice tags in Contacts. 2 Scroll to the number to which you wa nt to add the voice tag and select Options â Add voice tag . 3 Press Start to record a voice tag. After the starti ng tone, say clearly the words you want to record as a voice tag. Wait until the phone plays the recorded tag and saves it. A R0915_en.book Pag e 30 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Contacts (Phonebook) 31 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. symbol can be seen next to the number in the contact card ind icating t hat a voice tag has been added to it. Tip! To listen to, change, or delete a voice tag, open a contac t card and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indicated by ). Select Options â Voice tag . Then select either Playback , Change , or Delete . Making a call by saying a voice tag You must say the voice tag exactly as you sa id it when you recorded it. When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudsp eaker is in use. Hold the phone at a short distance away and say the voice tag clearly. ⢠Press and hold . A short tone is played and the note Speak now is displayed. The phone plays the original voic e tag, displays the name and number, and dials the number of the recognised voice tag. Creating contact groups 1 In Contacts, press to open the Groups list. 2 Select Options â New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group %N and press OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options â Add members . Options in the Groups list view: Open , New group , Delete , Re name , Ringin g tone , Contacts info , Settings , Help , and Exit . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Press OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options â Rename . Then enter the ne w name, and press OK . Removing members from a group 1 In the Groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options â Remove from group . 3 Press Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, s croll to the contact, and select Options â Belongs to groups . R0915_en.book Pag e 31 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 32 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery Camera Shortcut: Press in the standby mode to open Camera. With the Camera application you can take pictures an d record videos while on the move. The images and video are automatically save d in the Gallery application. The camera produces JPEG images, and video clips are reco rded in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension. You can also send images or a video in a multimedia message, as an e-m ail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection . Tip! You can insert an image into a contact card. See Saving names and numbers , p. âÂÂ28â . The Nokia 6630 device supports an image captur e resolution of up to 1280 x 960 pixels. The image resolution in these mater ials may appear different. Taking pictures Options before taking a picture: Capture , New , Activate night mode / Deact. night mode , Sequence mode / Norm al mode , Self-timer , Go to Gallery , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 Press in the standby mode. The Camera application opens, and you can see the view to be captured. See Figure. Press or to move between Image and Video views. 1. Indicator shows where the im ages will be saved: to phone memory ( ) or memory card ( ). 2. Shows an approximate es timate of how many images, depending on the selected image quality, fit in the memory of your phone or the memory card. See Image quality , p. âÂÂ34â . 3. The zoom indicator show s the zoom level. Press to zoom in, press to zoom out. 4. Night mode active indicator . 5. The sequence mode indicator . See p. âÂÂ34â . R0915_en.book Pag e 32 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 33 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 6. The self-timer ind icator sh ows how much time is left before a pictu re is taken. See p. âÂÂ34â . Shortcuts: Press to activate or deactivate Night mode. Press to activate or deactivate Sequence mode. Press to adjust brightness. Press to adjust contrast. 2 To take a picture, press . Do not move the phone before the Camera application starts to save the image. The im age is saved automatically in the Images folder of Gallery. See Gallery , p. âÂÂ36â . Saving the captured image may take longer if you have changed the zoom, brightness, or contrast settings. See Taking pictures , p. âÂÂ32â for zoom level, and When taking a picture , p. âÂÂ33â for adjusting brightness and contrast. When taking a picture: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take images or record video in a dark environment, use the Night mode. I f you are using the Night mode, the exposure time is lo nger and the camera needs to be kept still longer. ⢠To adjust brightness or contrast before taking a picture, select Options â Adjust â Brightness or Contrast . ⢠The resolution of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture, but the image remains the same size. Y ou may notice the difference in image quality if viewed on a PC, for example. ⢠Camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no key presses within a minute. To continue taking pictures, press . After the i mage has been take n: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, p ress . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . ⢠To send the image Via multimedia , via e-mail , or via Bluetooth , press . For more information see the Messaging chapter, p. âÂÂ45â and Bluetooth conn ection , p . âÂÂ87â . ⢠To set the picture as wallpaper in the standby mode, select Options â Set as wallpaper . Fig. 6 Pictures taken in a sequence. R0915_en.book Pag e 33 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 34 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Taking pictures in a sequence Select Options â Sequence mode to set the camera to take 6 pictures in a sequence. After the pictures have been taken, they are auto matically saved in the Gallery, and they are shown in a grid. See Fig. 6. You in the picture - self-timer Use the self-timer to delay the taking of a pi cture so that you can in cl ude yourself in the picture. Select the self-timer delay: Options â S elf-timer â 1 0 seconds , 20 se conds , or 30 seconds . Press Activate . You can see the self-timer indicator ( ) blink and hear a beep when the timer is running. The camera will ta ke the picture after the selected delay has elapsed. Adjusting camera settings 1 Select Options â Settingsâ Image. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change: Glossary: Resolution is a measure of sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolution refers to the number of pixels in an image. The more pixels, the more detailed the picture is, and the more memory it consumes. ⢠Image quality - High , Normal , and Basic . The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. The resolution of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture, but the image re mains the same size. You may notice the difference in image quality if viewed on a PC, for example. If you are going to print the image, select High or Normal image quality. ⢠Show captured image - Select Yes if you want to see the ca ptured image after it has been taken or No if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. ⢠Image resolution - Select the resolution you want to use for the images you are going to take. ⢠Default image name - Set a default name for the ima ges you are going to take. You can replace date with your own text (for example, âÂÂHoliday_2004âÂÂ). ⢠Memory in use - Select where to store your images. R0915_en.book Pag e 34 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 35 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Recording videos 1 Press Camera in the standby mode. 2 Press or to move between Image and Video views. Open the Video view. An indicator shows where the video will be save d: to phone memory ( ) or memory card () . 3 Press to sta rt recording. The record icon is shown. Options before recording a video: Record , New , Activate nigh t mode / Deact. night mode , Mute / Unmute , Go to Gallery , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1. The elapsed time / time left with the current video length setting. 2. The zoom indicator shows the zoom level. Press to zoom i n on your subject before or during recording. Press to zoom out. 3. Microphone muted indicator . 4. Night mode active indicator . To pause recording at any time, press . The pause icon starts to blink on the display. Press again to resume reco rding. Shortcuts: Press to activate or deactivate Night mode. Press to adjust brightness. Press to adjust contrast. Video recording is automatically stopped if re cording is set to pause and there are no key presses within a minute. 4 Press Stop to stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved to the Video clips folder of the Gallery. See Galle ry , p. âÂÂ36â . After a video clip has been recorded: ⢠To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, select Option s â Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to record a new video, press . ⢠To send the video Via multimedia , via e-mail , or via Bluetooth , press . For more information see the Messaging chapter, p. âÂÂ45â and Bluetooth conn ection , p . âÂÂ87â . R0915_en.book Pag e 35 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 36 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Adjusting video recorder settings Select Options â Settingsâ Video and the setting you want to change: ⢠Length - If you select Maximum , the length of the video recording is restricted to one hour per clip. Select Short to record video clips up to 300 kB, which is approximately 30 seconds in duration, so that they can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some network s, however, may only support sending of multimedia messages with the maximum size of 1 00 kB. ⢠Video resolutio n , Default video name and Memory in use . Gallery Tip! You can transfer music files from a computer to your MMC card using Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Press and select Gallery . In the Gallery application you can store and organise your images, sound clips, playlists, video c lips, streaming links, and .ram files. Select Images , Video clips , Tracks , Sound clips , Links , or All files , and press to open it. You can browse, open, and create folders; an d mar k, copy and move items to fol ders. Sound clips, video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See RealPlayer⢠, p. âÂÂ4 1â . Tip! To leave the application open and music playing in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press and select Gallery . ⢠Press to open a file or a folder. Images are opene d in the Image viewer. See Viewing images , p. âÂÂ37â . ⢠To copy or move files to the memory card or to phone memory, select a file and Options â Organ ise â Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem . . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . ⢠To download files into the Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downls. , Video downlds. , Track downlds. , or Sound downlds. . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark for the site to download from. R0915_en.book Pag e 36 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Camera and Gallery 37 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! You can transfer images from your phone to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. ⢠To search for a file, select Optio ns â Find . Start to enter a search string (for example, the name or date of the file you are search ing). Files that match your sear ch are shown. Viewing images Pictures taken with the Camera applicat ion are stored in th e Gallery. Images can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluetooth. To be able to view a received image in Gallery, you need to save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Open the Images folder in the Gallery to start the image viewer, select an image, and press to view it. Options when viewing an image: Send , Set as wallpaper , Rotate , Zoom in / Zoom out , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View details , Add to 'Go to' , Help , and Exit . ⢠To zoom an image, select Options â Zoom in (or press ) or Zoom out (or press ). You can see the zooming ratio at th e top of the display. Press and hold to return to the normal view. The z ooming ratio is not stored permanently. ⢠To see more of the image, select Options â Full screen (or press ). The panes around the image are removed. T o move the focus when you are zooming an image, use the scroll key. ⢠To rotate the image, select Options â Rotate (or press to rotate anticlockwise and to rotate clockwise). R0915_en.book Pag e 37 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 38 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Media Video editor To create custom video clips, press and select Media â Vid. editor . You can create custom video clips by combining and trimmi ng video clips, and adding sound clips, transitions, and effects. Trans itions are visu al effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. Editing video, sound, and transitions 1 Mark and select one or more video clips. 2 Select Options â Edit . In the Edit video view, you ca n insert video clips to make a custom video clip, and edit the clips by trimming and adding effects. You can add sound clips and change their duration. To modify the vid eo, select one of the following op tions: Preview - Previews the custom video clip. Cut - Trims the video clip or a sound clip in th e Cut video clip or in the Cut sound clip view. Insert : ⢠Video clip - Inserts the selected video clip. A thumbnai l of the video clip is shown in the Main view. A thumbnail consists of th e first non-black view of the video clip. The name and length of the sele cted video clip is also shown. ⢠Sound clip - Inserts the selected sound clip. Th e name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the Main view. ⢠New sound clip - Records a new sound clip to the selected location. Fig. 7 The Edit video view, where the selected transition is set to Dip to black . R0915_en.book Pag e 38 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 39 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options â Take snapshot in the Play view, Edit Preview view or in the Cut view. Edit video c lip : ⢠Move - Moves the video clip to the selected location. ⢠Add colour effect - Inserts a colour effect on the video clip. ⢠Use slow motion - Slows the speed of the video clip. ⢠Mute sound / Unmute so und - Mutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. ⢠Remove - Removes the video clip from the video. ⢠Duplicate - Makes a copy of the selected video clip or sound clip. ⢠Edit sound cli p : ⢠Move - Moves the sound clip to th e selected location. ⢠Set duration - Edits the sound clip length. ⢠Remove - Removes the sound clip from the video. ⢠Duplicate - Makes a copy of the selected video clip or sound clip. ⢠Edit transition - There are three types of transition s: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clips. A start tra nsition can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. 3 Select Save to save your video. You can define the Memory in use in the Settings . The default is the phone memory. Tip! In the Settings view you can define the Default video name , Default sc. shot name and the Memory in use . Select Send : Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth if you want to send the video. Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, a symbol will appear. Tip! I f yo u w an t t o s e n d a v i de o cl i p t ha t i s o v er t h e ma x im u m m ul t i me d i a m e s s ag e size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth. Sending data using Bluetooth , p. âÂÂ88â . You can also transfer your vi deos using Bluetooth into your Bluetooth-enabled personal computer, or by using a memory card reader (internal/ external ). R0915_en.book Pag e 39 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 40 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Movie director To create muvees, pr ess and select Media â Mo vie . muvees are short, edited video clips that can contain video, music and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by the Movie director after you have selected the st yle for the muvee. Movie director uses the default music and text associated with the chos en style. Every style has, for example, its own font style, colour, mus ic, and pace. To Custom muvee you can select yo ur own video and music clips, images and style, and you ca n also ad d an opening and closing message. muvees can be sent using MMS. Open Movie , and press or to move between the and views. You can also return to th e main view from the view by pressing Done . The view cont ains a list of video clips that you can Play , Send, Re name , and Delete . Tip! To download new styles to your phone, select Style downlds. from the Movie director main view. ⢠To creat e a quick muvee, select Quick muvee , and press . Select a style for the muvee from the style list, and press . The created muvee will be s aved in the Movie director muvee list. The muvee will be played automatically after savi ng. ⢠To create a custom muvee, select Cu stom muvee . In Video , Image , Style , or Music , select the clips you want to include in your muvee. In Message you can add an opening text and a closing text to a muvee. Select Crea te muvee .: ⢠Multimedia message - the length of the muvee is optimised for MMS sending. ⢠Same as music - to set the muvee duration to be the same as the music clip chosen. Options in the muvee list options menu: Play , Send , Rename , Delete , Help and Exit . ⢠User defined - to define the length of the muvee. Select Options â Sav e . ⢠To preview the custom muvee before saving it, in Preview muvee view, select Options â Play . ⢠To create a new custom muvee by using the same style set tings, select Options â Recreate . R0915_en.book Pag e 40 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 41 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠To add an opening text and a closing text to a custom muvee when you are creating it, in Create muvee view selec t Message . Enter the opening message and the closing message, and select Done . Settings Select Settings to edit the following options: ⢠Memory in use - Select where to store your muvees. ⢠Resolution - Select the resolution of your muvees. ⢠Default muve e name - Set a default nam e for the muvees . Image mgr. To browse your images visually, press and select Media â Image mgr . See Fig. 8. 1 Press to select the memory: Phone or Memory card . Image manager also shows how many folders or images are in the selected folder. 2 Open a folder to browse your images visually. Press and to move between images and folders. Press to view an image. ⢠Press and simultaneously to mark im ages for an image show. A check mark is shown next to a selected image. Select Options â Image show . Press and to view the next or previous image in the show. Options in RealPlayer when a clip is selected: Play , Play in full screen / Continue , Continue in full sc r. ; Stop , M ute / Unmute , Clip details , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Recorder Press and select Media â Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conv ersation, both parties w ill hear a tone every five seconds during recording. RealPlayer⢠Press and select Media â RealPlayer . With RealPlayer⢠you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists, or stream media files over the air. A streaming link can be Fig. 8 Images viewed in Image manager. R0915_en.book Pag e 41 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 42 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. activated when you are browsing Web pages, or it can be stored in the phone memory or memory card. RealPlayer supports files with the extensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3 and .wav.However, RealPlayer does not necessarily su pport all file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer will a ttempt to open all .mp4 files, but some .mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this pho ne. Playing video or sound clips 1 To play a media file stored in phone memory or memory card, select Options â Open and select: Icons: - Repeat, - Random, - Repeat and random, - Loudspeaker muted ⢠Most recent clips - To play one of the last si x files played in RealPlayer, ⢠Saved clip - To play a file saved in the Gallery. See Gallery , p. âÂÂ36â , ⢠Mem. card sound clip s - To play a file saved in the memory card. 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mo de, press . Press again to change back to normal scre en mode. Streaming content over the air Tip! To leave the application open and music playing in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press and select RealPlayer . To stream live content, you must first conf igure your default access point. See Data connections and access points , p. âÂÂ97â . Many service providers require you to use an Internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. Contact your service provider for more information. Note: In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp :// URL address. However, Browser is able to open an http link to a .r am file, and pass it to RealPlayer. R0915_en.book Pag e 42 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 43 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Shortcuts during play: To fast forward, press and hold . To rewind through the media file, press and hold . To mute the sound, press and hold until the indicator is displayed. To turn on the sound, press and hold until you see the indicator. To stream content over the air , select a stre aming link saved in the Gallery, on a Web page, or received in a text message or multim edia message. Before live content begins streaming, your phone will connect to the site and start loading the content. Receiving RealPlayer settings You may receive RealP layer settings in a spec ial text message from the network operator or service provider. See Receiving logos, tone s, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Changing the RealPlayer setting s Select Options â Settings : Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers use them to provide additional security or spee d up access to browser pages that contain sound or video clips. Video - To have RealPlayer automatically repe at video clips after they finish playing. Audio settings - To select i f you want to repeat playing of trac k lists and play sound clips on a track list in random o rder. Connection settings - To select whether to use a pr oxy server, change the default access point, and set the time-outs and port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. ⢠Proxy settings: ⢠Use proxy - To use a proxy server, select Yes . ⢠Proxy serv. address - Enter the IP address of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number - Enter the port number of the proxy server. ⢠Network settings: ⢠Default access point - Scroll to the access point you want to use to connect to the Internet, and press . ⢠Online time - Set the time for RealPlayer to di sconnect from the network when you have paused a media clip playing through a network link, select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and press OK . R0915_en.book Pag e 43 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Media 44 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Connection time-out - Press or to set the maximum time to elapse between selecting a network link and conne cting to the media server, and press OK . ⢠Server time-out - Press or to set the maximum time to wait for a respo nse from the media server before disconnecting, and press OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port - Enter the lowest port number of the server's port range. T he minimum value is 6970. ⢠Highest UDP por t - Enter the highest port number of the server' s port range. Th e maximum value is 32000. Select Options â Advanced settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networks. R0915_en.book Pag e 44 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 45 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Messaging Options in the Messaging main view: Open , Create message , Connec t (shown if you have defined mailbox settings) / Disconnect (shown if a connection to mailbox is active), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings , Help , and Exit . Press and select Messaging . In Messaging, you can create, send, receiv e, view, edit, and organise text messages, mult imedia messages, e-mail messag es, and special text messages containing data. You can also receive messages and data through Bluetooth, receive Web service messages, cell broadcast messages as well as send service commands. Note: These functions can only be used if they are supported by your network operator or service pro vider. Only devi ces that offer compatible mul timedia message, or e-mail features can receive and display these messages. Some networks might provide the recipient device with a Web page link to view multimedia messages. When you open Messaging, you can see the Ne w message function and a list of folders: Inbox - contains received messages excep t e-mail and c ell broadcast messages. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . Tip! Organise your messages by adding new folders under My folders . My folders - for organising your messages into folders. Mailbox - In Ma il bo x y o u c an c on ne ct to y ou r r em ot e ma il bo x to re tr ie v e y ou r n e w e-mail messages or view your previously retr ieved e-mail messages offline. See Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, you ca n switch between the folders by pressing or . Drafts - stores draft messages that have not been sent. Sent - stores the last 15 messages that ha ve been sent excluding messages sent using Bluetooth. To change the number of messages to be saved, see Other setti ngs , p. âÂÂ62â . Outbox - is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to b e sent. Reports - You can request the networ k to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messa ges you have se nt (network service) . Receiving a delivery R0915_en.book Pag e 45 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 46 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. report of a multimedia message that has be en sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. ⢠To enter and send service requests (also kn own as USSD comman ds), such as activa tion commands for network services, to your servic e provider, select Messaging â Options â Service command in the main view of Messaging. Options in Cell broadcast: Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Remove hotmark , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠Cell broadcast is a network service that a llows you to receive messages on various topics, suc h as weather or t raffic co nditions from your se rvice provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, cont act yo ur service provider. In the main view of Messaging, select Options â Cell broa dcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Cell broadcast messages cannot be receiv ed in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Writing text Traditional text input Icons: and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the word, is written in upper case, and all the other letters will automatically be written in lower case. indicates number mode. The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( - ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more ch aracters availa ble for a number key than are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and ho ld to clear more than one character. ⢠The most common punctuation mar ks are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. R0915_en.book Pag e 46 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 47 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Press to open a list of sp ecial charac ters. Use to mov e through the l ist, and press Select to select a character. ⢠To insert a space, pres s . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . Predictive text input - Dictionary You can enter any letter with a single keypre ss. The predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This will activate predictive text input for all editors in th e phone. The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are wr iting text using predictive text input. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys - . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a . See the Fig. 9. The word suggestion changes after each key press. 3 When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, confirm it by pressing or add a space by p ressing . ⢠If the word is not correct, press repe atedly to view th e matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Or, press and select Dictionary â Matches . ⢠If the ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, press Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and press OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes fu ll, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Fig. 9 The word match is evolving, wai t until you have keyed in t he whole word before you check the results. R0915_en.book Pag e 47 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 48 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tips on using predictive text input ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and ho ld to clear more than one character. ⢠To change between th e different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . If you press quickly twice, the pred ictive text input is turned off. Tip! The predictive text input will try to guess whic h commonl y used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the dictionary. ⢠To insert a number in letter mo de, pr ess and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠The most common punctuation marks are availa ble under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the d esired punct uation ma rk. ⢠Press and hold to open a list of special characters. ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. â¢P r e s s , s e l e c t Dictionary , and press to select one of the following options: Matches to view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert w ord to add a word (up to 32 letters) to th e dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. Edit word to edit the word using traditional text input. This is availa ble if the word is active (underlined). Tip! When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), C opy (if text has been selected), Paste (when text has been cut or copied first), Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writing language: (changes the input language for all editors in the phone). Writing compound word s Write the first half of a compound word; to co nfirm it, press . Write the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turning predictive text input off Press , and select Dictionary â Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 48 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 49 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Copying text to clipboard 1 To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same ti me, press or . As the selection mov es, text is hi ghlighted. 2 To copy the text to clipboard, while s till holding , press Copy . 3 To in sert the text into a docum ent, press and hold , and press Paste . Or, press once, and select Paste . ⢠To select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . ⢠To remove the selected text from the document, press . Writing and se nding messages The appearance of a multimed ia message may vary depending on the receiving device. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred, or forwarded. Tip! You can start to create a message from any application that has the option Send . Select a file (an image, text) to be added t o the messag e, and select Optio ns â Send . Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See Receiving MMS and e-mail settings , p. âÂÂ51â and Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . 1 Select New me ssage . A list of message options opens. ⢠Text message - to send a text message. ⢠Multimedia message - to send a multimedia message (MMS). ⢠E-mail - to send an e-mail. If you have not s et up your e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 2 Press to select recipients or groups fro m Contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Pr ess to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the Clipboard. 3 Press to move to the message field. R0915_en.book Pag e 49 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 50 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Attachments (e-mai l), Preview (MMS), Obj ects (MMS), Remove ( MMS), Delete , Check contacts , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exit . 4 Write the message. Note: Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the normal 160-character limit. If your message exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent as a series of two or more messages an d sending may cost you more. In the navigation bar, you can see the messag e length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 charac ters for the text to be sent as two messages. Some character s may take more sp ace than others. ⢠To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options â Insert object â Image , Sound clip or Video clip . Whe n sound is added, the icon is shown in the naviga tion bar. Tip! When you send a multimedia message to an e-mail address or a device that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you are not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support sending large file, it is recommended that you use a s maller image size or a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options â Settings â Multim edia message â Image size in the Messaging main view. If you select Insert new â Sound clip , Recorder o pens, and you can record a new sound. Press Select , the new sound is automatically sa ved, and a copy is inserted in the messag e. Select Options â Preview to see what the multimedia message looks like. ⢠To add an attach ment to an e-mail, select Options â Insert â Image , Sound clip, Video clip , Note , or Template . E-mail attachments are indicated by in the naviga tion bar. 5 To send the message, select Options â Send , or press . Note: E-mail messages are au tomatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in th e Outbox with th e status Failed . Tip! In Messaging you can also create presen tations and send them in a multimedia message. In Multimedia mess age editor view, select Options â Create presen tation (shown Fig. 10 Creating a multimedia message. R0915_en.book Pag e 50 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 51 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ). See Settings for multimedia messages , p. âÂÂ58â . Receiving MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message fr om your network operator or service provider. See Receiving logos, tones, busine ss cards, calendar ent ries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . Tip! To send files other than sounds and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Send â Via e-mail , if available. For availability of and subscription to dat a services, please contact your network operator or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your service provider. Entering the MMS se ttings manually: 1 Select Tools â Sett ings â Connection â Access points and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point. See Connectio n settings , p. âÂÂ97â . 2 Select Me ssaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message . Open Access point in use and select the access point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See also Settings for multimedia messages , p. âÂÂ5 8â . Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (I AP) correctly. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . Inbox icons: - unread messages in Inbox, - unread text message, - unread multimedia message, and - data received through Bluetooth. ⢠Define your e-mail settings co rrectly. See Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instru ctions giv en by your remote mailbox and Internet service provider (ISP). Inbox - receiving messages When you receive a message, and the text 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. Press Show to open the message. To open a messag e in Inbox, scroll to it and press . R0915_en.book Pag e 51 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 52 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving multimedia messages Important: Multimedia message objec ts may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message, and simultaneously listen to a sound through the loudspeaker ( is shown if sound is included). Click the arrow in the icon to listen to the sound. To see what kinds of media objects have b een included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options â Objects . You can choose to save a multimedia object file in your phone or send it, for example, th rough Bluetooth to another compatible device. You may also receive multimedia presentati ons. You can view th ese presentations by selecting Options â Play presentation . Copyright protections may prevent some imag es, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred, or forwarded. Receiving logos, tones, busine ss cards, calendar entries, and settings Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to Contacts. Your phone can receive many kin d s of text me ssages th at contain data ( ), also called Over-The -Air (OTA) mes sages. ⢠Configuration message - You may receive a text message service number, voice mailbox number, Internet access point settings, acce ss point login script settings, or e-mail settings from your network operator, service provider, or company information management department in a configuration me ssage. To save the settings, select Options â Save all . ⢠Business card - To save the information to Conta cts, select Options â Save busin ess card . Certificates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. R0915_en.book Pag e 52 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 53 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Ringing tone - To save the ringing tone, select Options â Save . ⢠Operator logo - For the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options â Save . Tip! To change the default access point settings for multimedia messaging, select Messaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message â Access point in use . ⢠Calendar en try - To save the invitation, select Options â Save to C alendar . ⢠Web message - To save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options â Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point setti ngs and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options â Save all . ⢠E-mail notifi cation - Tells you how many new e-mails you have in you r remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Receiving Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are notification s (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availa bility and subscription, contact your service provider. My folders Tip! You can use texts in the Templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. In My folders, you ca n organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail a ccount, you are prompted to do so. See Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have several mailboxes (up to six). R0915_en.book Pag e 53 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 54 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Opening the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose wh ether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages an d e-mail headings offline or conn ect to the e-mail server. When you scroll to your mail box and pres s , the phone asks you i f you want to Conn ect to mailbox? ⢠Select Yes to connect to your mailbox and retrie ve new e-mail headings or messages. When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also Essent ial indicators , p. âÂÂ15â and Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . ⢠Select No to view previously retrieved e-mail me ssages offline. When you view e-mail messages offline, your phone is no t connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieving e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options â Connect t o start a connection to a remote mailbox. Important: E-mail messages may co ntain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options â Retrieve e-mail : ⢠New - to retrieve all new e-ma il messages to your phone. ⢠Selected - to retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. ⢠All - to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, press Cancel . 2 After you h ave retrieved the e- mail messages, you can continue viewing them online. Or, select Options â Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. Fig. 11 Mailbox with different status icons. R0915_en.book Pag e 54 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 55 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. E-mail status icons: - new e-mail (offline or online mode), the content has not been retrieved to your phone. - new e-mail, the content has been retrieved to your phone. - e-mail message has been read. - e-mail heading that has been read and the message content has been deleted from the phone. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been r etrieved (arrow in the icon is pointin g outwards) and you are offline, you will be asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail att achments, open a messag e that has the attac hment indicator , and select Opt ions â Attachments . If the attachment has a dimme d indicator, it has not been retrieved to the phone; se lect Options â Retrieve . In the Attachments view, you can retrieve, open, save, or remove attachment s. You can a lso send attachments using Bluetooth. T i p ! I f y o u r m a i l b o x u s e s the IMAP4 protocol, you can de fine how many messages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the atta chments or not. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headers only, partia lly (kB), or messages and attachments. Deleting e-mail messages ⢠To delete the contents of an e- mail message from the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options â Delete . In Dele te msg. fr om: select Phone only . Note: The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delet e the messa ge content, the e-ma il heading stays in your phone. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! To copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders, selec t Options â Copy to folder . Select a folder from the list, and press OK . ⢠To delete an e-mail from both the phone as well as from the remote mailbox, select Options â Delete msg. from: â Phone and server . Note: If you are offline, the e-mail is delete d first from your phone. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically del eted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the PO P3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connectio n to the remote mailbox. R0915_en.book Pag e 55 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 56 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To cancel deleting an e-mail from bo th th e phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options â Undelete . Disconnecting from the mailbox Tip! You can also leave your mailbox connection open and the new e-mails ( Headers only as default) will be retrieved fr om the remote mailbox to your phone automatically (only if IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server). To leave the Messaging application open in the background, press twice. Leaving the connection open may increase your call costs due to the data traf fic. When you are online, select Option s â Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox. See also Essential indicators , p. âÂÂ15â . Viewing e-mail messag es when offline When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query. You can read the previously retrieved e-mail headings or the retrieved e-mail messages or both. You can also write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent th e next time you connect to the mailbox. Outbox - messages waiting to be sent Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages wa iting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox: Sending , Waiting / Queued ⢠Resend at %U (time) - The phone will try to send the message again after a t ime-out period. Press Send to restart the sending immediately. ⢠Deferred - You can set documents to be âÂÂon holdâ while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is be in g sent and sele ct Options â Defer sending . ⢠Failed - The maximum number of sending atte mpts has been reached. Sending has fa i l ed . I f y o u w e r e t r y in g t o s e nd a t ex t message, open the message and check that the Sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your phone is outside network coverage. You can also sche dule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. R0915_en.book Pag e 56 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 57 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Viewing messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Opti ons â SIM messages . 2 Select Options â Mark/Unmarkâ Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options â Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and press OK to start copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Settings for text messages Options when editing text message centre settings: Edit , New msg. centre , Delete , Help , and Exit . Select Messaging â Optionsâ Settingsâ Text message. ⢠Message centres - Lists al l the text message servic e centr es that have been defin ed. ⢠M s g . c e n t r e i n u s e - Select which messa ge centre is used for delivering text messages. ⢠Receive report (network service) - To request the net work to send delivery reports on your messages. When set to No , o nly th e Sent status is sho wn in Log. See Log , p. âÂÂ25â . ⢠Message validity - If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the v alidity period, the message is removed from the text message service centre. The network must support this feature. Maximum tim e is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. ⢠Message sent as - Change this option only if you ar e sure that your service centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your network operator. ⢠Preferred connection - You ca n send text messages through the normal GSM network or through packet data, if supported by the network. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . ⢠Reply via same ctr. (network service) - Choose Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message service centre number. Adding a new text message ce ntre 1 Select Message ce ntres â Options â New ms g. centre . R0915_en.book Pag e 57 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 58 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Press , write a name f or the service centre, and press OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message service centre. You receive the number from your service provider. 4 Press OK . 5 To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new service centre. Settings for multimedia messages Select Messaging â Optionsâ Sett ingsâ Multi media message . ⢠Image size - Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Original (shown only when the MMS cre ation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Sm all and Large . S electing Original will increase the size of the multimedia message. ⢠MMS creation mode - If you sele ct Guided , the phone will inform you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. By selecting Restricted the phone will prevent you from sending messages that are not supported. ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - Select which access point is used as the preferred connection for th e multimedia message centre. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider through a n OTA message . Contact your service provider for more information . See also Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p . âÂÂ52â . ⢠Recept. in home ne t. - Select whether you want the re ception of the MMS messages in the home network to be Automatic , Defer retrieva l or Off . If you have selected Defer retrieval the multimedia messag ing centre will save the message. To retrieve the message later, set to Automatic . ⢠Reception if ro aming - Select how you want the MMS me ssages to be retrieved outside the home network. When you are outside your home network, sendin g and receiving multime dia messages may cost you more . If Reception if roaming â Automatic has been selected, your phone can automatically make an active packet da ta connection to retrieve the message. Select Off from Reception i f roaming if you do not want to receive multimedia messages when you are outside your home network. R0915_en.book Pag e 58 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 59 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Allow anon. messages - Select No if you want to reject messages coming from an anonymous sender. ⢠Receive adverts - Define whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements or not. ⢠Receive report (network service) - Set to Yes if you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the Log. Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multim edia message that has been sent to an e-mail address mi ght not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending - Choose Yes if you do not want your phone to send delivery reports of received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity - If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the v alidity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The network must suppor t this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Settings for e-mail Select Messaging â Optionsâ Settingsâ E-mail , or in the Mailbox main view, select Options â E-mail settings , and s elect: Mailbox in use - Select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes - Opens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailbox es have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to c hange the settings: Mailbox settings ⢠Mailbox name - Enter a descriptive name for the mailbox. ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - Choose an Intern et ac cess point (IAP ) for the mailbox. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . ⢠My e-mail address ( Must be defined ) - Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your me ssages are sent to this address. R0915_en.book Pag e 59 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 60 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Outgoing mail se rver ( Must be define d ) - Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e- mail. You may be able to use only the outgoing mail server of your network operator. Contact your se rvice provider/network operator for more information . ⢠Send message - Define how e-mail is sent from your phone: Immediatel y - The device starts to establish a connection to the mailbox after you have selected Send message . When conn. avail. - E-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. ⢠User name - Enter your user name, given to you by your service provider. ⢠Password: - Enter your password. If you lea ve this field blank, you will be prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. ⢠Incoming m ail serve r ( Must be define d ) - Enter the IP a ddress or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. ⢠Mailbox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol that yo ur remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see the latest e-mail messages , you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. ⢠Security (ports) - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. ⢠APOP secure login (not show n if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type ) - Used with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of pa sswords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settings ⢠E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - Define how many new e-mails will be retrieved to mailbox. ⢠Retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to IMAP4) - Define which parts of the e-mails will be retrieved: Hea d ers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. R0915_en.book Pag e 60 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 61 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - Choose whether you want to retrieve e- mail with or without attachments. ⢠Subscribed folders (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - You can subscribe other folders in remote mailbox as well and retrieve content from those folders. ⢠Send copy to self - Select Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-m ail address . ⢠Include signature - Select Yes if you want to attach a sign ature to your e-m ail messages. ⢠My name - Enter your own name h ere. Your name will replace your e - mail address in the recipientâÂÂs phone in case the recipi entâÂÂs phone is supporti ng this function. Automati c retriev al ⢠Header retrieval - When this function is on, you can define when and how often the messages will be retr ieved from the mailbox. Activating Header retrieval may increase y our call co sts due t o the data t raffic. Settings for Web service messages Select Messaging â Optionsâ Settin gs â Service mes sage . Choose whether or not you want to receive service messages. Download message s - Choose Automatically if you want to set the phone to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when the phone receives a ser vice message. Settings for cell broadcast (network service) Check the available topics and related to pic nu mbers with your service provider, and select Messaging â Options â Settin gs â Cell broadcast to change the setti ngs. ⢠Language - All allows you to receive cell br oadcast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Othe r . R0915_en.book Pag e 61 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Messaging 62 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Topic detection - If you have set Top ic detection â On , the phone will automatically search for new topic numbers, and save the new numbers without a name to the to pic list. Choose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging and select Options â Settingsâ Ot her. ⢠Save sent messages - Choose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder. Tip! If Memory card is selected, activate the Offline profile before opening the memory card slot door or removing the memory card. When the memory card is not available, mess ages will be saved in the phone memory. ⢠No. of saved msgs. - Define how many sent messages will be saved to the Sent items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 mess ages. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use - Choose to which memory you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . ⢠New e-mail alerts - Choose whether you want to see the new e-mail indications, like tone or a note, when new mail is received to the mailbox. R0915_en.book Pag e 62 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Calendar and To-do 63 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Calendar and To-do Shortcut: Press any key ( - ) in any calendar view. A Meeting entry is opened, and the characters you keyed in are added to the Subject fi eld. Calendar - creating calendar entries 1 Press and select Calendar . 2 Select Opti ons â New entry : ⢠Meeting to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to write a general entry for a day. ⢠Anniversary to remind you of birthdays or spec ial dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. Tip! If you are editing or deleting a repeated entry, ch o ose how you want the change to take effect: All occurrences - all repeated entries are deleted / This entry only - only the current entry will be deleted. For example, your weekly class has been cancelled. Yo u have set the calendar to remind you every week. Select This entry only and the calendar will remind you again next week. 3 Fill in the f ields. Use to move between fields. Alarm - Select On and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. Alarm is shown with in the Day view. Stopping a calendar alarm - Press Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text will stay on the screen. Press Stop to end the calendar alarm. Press Snooze to set the alarm to snooze. Repeat - Press to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the Day view). Repeat until - You can set an end date for the repeated entr y. Synchronisation - Private - after synchr onisation the calend ar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be shown to others wi th online access to view the calendar. Public - the calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None - the calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise. 4 To save the entry, press Done . Tip! You can send calendar entries to a compatible phone. See the Messaging chapter, and Sending data using Bluetooth , p. âÂÂ88â . R0915_en.book Pag e 63 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Calendar and To-do 64 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar views Tip! Select Options â Settin gs to change the view that is shown when you open the calendar or the starting day of the week. Tip! To send a calendar note, select Options â Sen d â Via text message / Via multimedia / Via Bluetooth . In the Month view, dates that have calendar en tries are marked with a small triangle at the right bottom corner. In the Week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. ⢠Icons in Day and Week views: - Memo , and - Anniversary . There is no icon for Meeting . ⢠To go to a cert ain date, select Options â Go to date . Write the date, and press OK . ⢠Press to jump to today. Tip! You can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your phone or synchronise your calendar and to-do to a compatible PC us ing Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Setting a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to remind you of a meetin g. This option is not available for notes and anniversaries. 1 Open a n ote in which you want to set an alarm, and select Alarm â On . 2 Set the Alarm time and Alarm date . 3 Scroll down to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeated. 4 Press Done . R0915_en.book Pag e 64 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Calendar and To-do 65 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. To delete a calendar alarm, open the note in which you want to delete an a larm, and select Alarm â Off . Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week start s on , and Week view title , select Options â Set tings . To-do - task list Press and select Organiser â To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. ⢠To add a note, press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. ⢠To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. ⢠To set the priority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority fi eld, and press to select the priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . ⢠To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options â Mark as done . ⢠To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and sel ect Options â Mark as not done . R0915_en.book Pag e 65 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 66 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web Various service providers mainta in pages specifically design ed for mobile devices. To access these pages, pres s and select Web . These pages use the Wireless Markup Language (WML), Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML), or Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, p ricing, and tariffs with yo ur network operator or service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Accessing the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See the sections Receiving browser settings or Keying in the settings manually . ⢠Make a connection to Web. Se e Making a connection , p. âÂÂ68â . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See Browsing , p. âÂÂ69â . ⢠End the connection to Web. See Ending a connection , p. âÂÂ7 1â . Receiving browser settings Tip! Settings may be available, for example, on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings i n a spec ial text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the Web page . See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Keying in the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. R0915_en.book Pag e 66 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 67 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 1 Select Tools â Settings â Connection â Access points , and define the settings for an access point. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . Options in the Bookmarks view: Open , Download , Back to page , Bookmark man ager , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Send , Find bookmark , Details , Settings , Help and Exit . 2 Select Web â Options â Bookmark manager â Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defined for the curr ent access point. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page re quires, a user name and password. Note: Your device may hav e some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse th ese sites. If you choose to acces s them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. The starting page defined for the default access point. If you use another default access point for browsing, t he star ting page is c hanged accordingly. The automatic bookmarks folder contai ns bookmark s ( ) that are collected automatically when you browse pages. The b ookmarks in thi s folder are automatic ally organised according to domain. Any bookmark showing the title or Internet address of the bookmark. Shortcut: To start a connection, press and hold in standby mode. Adding bookmarks manually 1 In the Bookmarks view, select Options â Bookmark managerâ Add bookmark. 2 Start to fill in the fields. Only the URL addr ess must be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Select Options â Save to save the bookmark. R0915_en.book Pag e 67 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 68 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Sending bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark, and select Options â Send â Via text me ssage . Press to send. It is possible to send more than one bookmark at the same time. Making a connection Tip! To send a bookmark, scroll to it, and select Options â Sendâ Via text message . Once you have stored all the required conn ection settings, you can access the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or wr ite the address in the Go to field ( ). When you write the address, matching bookmarks are shown at the top of the Go to field. Press to select a matching bookmark. Options when browsing (depend on the page you are viewing): Open , Accept , Remove file , Op en in viewer , Open Wallet , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , View images , Navigation opti ons , Advanced options , Show images , Send bookmark , Find , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 2 Press to start to download the page. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed du ring a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that th e dat a transmission be tween the gateway and the content server (or place where the requeste d resource is stored) is sec ure. The service provider secures the data tr ansmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Options â Detailsâ Security to view details about the connection, encryptions status, and informa tion about se rver and user authentication. Security features may be required for some servi ces, such as banking se rvices. For such connections you need security cert ificates. For more information, contact your service provider. See also Certif. management , p. âÂÂ103â . R0915_en.book Pag e 68 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 69 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Browsing On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. ⢠To open a link, to check boxes, and make selections, press . ⢠To go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not availabl e, select Options â Navigation options â History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The hi s tory list is cleared each time a session is closed. ⢠To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options â Navigation options â Reload . ⢠To save a bookmark, select Option s â Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the Bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view again, select Options â Back to page . ⢠To save a page while browsing, select Options â Advanced options â Save page . You can save pages either to the phone memory or on a memory card, and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the Boo kmarks view to open the Saved pages view. ⢠To enter a new URL address, select Options â Navigation options â Go to web address . ⢠To open a sublist of commands or action s for the currently open page, select Options â Service options . ⢠You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your phone, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Shortcut: Use to jump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. Copyright protections may prev ent some images, ringing to nes, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Important: Only install soft ware from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful sof tware. ⢠To download and view new Web servic e messages while browsing, select Options â Advanced options â Re ad service msgs . (shown only if there are new messages). See also Receiving Web service messages , p. âÂÂ53â . R0915_en.book Pag e 69 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 70 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Viewing saved pages If you regularly browse pages containing info rmation which does not c hange very often, you can save and browse them when offline. In the saved pages view you can also c reate folders to store your saved browser pages. Options in the Saved pages view: Open , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , Mark/ Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠To open the Saved pages view, press in the Bookmarks view. In the Saved pages view, press to open a saved page ( ). ⢠To save a page, while browsing select Options â Advanced options â Save page . ⢠To start a connection to the brows er service and to download the latest version of the page, select Op tions â Reload . The phone stays online after you reload the page. Tip! Your browser collects bookmarks automatically while you are browsing Web pages. The bookmarks are stored to the Automatic bookmarks folder ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also Settings for Web , p. âÂÂ71â . Downloading and purchasing items You can download items such as ringing to ne s, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Thes e items can b e provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your phone, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important: Only install applications from sources that offer adequate protection against harm ful software. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . ⢠If the item is provided free, press Accept . On ce downloaded, the content is automatically opened in a suitable application. To cancel the download, press Cancel . 2 Choose the appropriate option to pu rchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully read all the info rmation provided . If the online content is compatible, you ca n use your wallet information to make the purchase. R0915_en.book Pag e 70 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 71 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 4 Select Ope n Wallet . You will be prompted for your wa llet code. See Creating a wallet code , p. âÂÂ76â . 5 Select the appropriate card category from your wallet. 6 Select Fill in . This will upload the se lected wallet information. If the wallet does not contain all informatio n necessary for the pu rc hase, you will be requested to enter the re maining details manually. Note: Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Ending a connection Select Options â Advanced options â Disconnect , or press and hold to quit b rowsing and to return to the standby mode. Emptying the cache The information or services you have access ed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. Note: A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed conf idential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. T he inform ation or services you have accessed is stored in the cache memory of the phone. To empty the cache, select Options â Navigation options â Clear cache . Settings for Web Select Options â Settings: ⢠Default access poi nt - To change the default access point, press to open a list of available access points. See Connection settings , p. âÂÂ97â . R0915_en.book Pag e 71 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Web 72 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Show images - To select if you want to load im ages while browsing or not. If you choose No , you can later load images during browsing by selecting Options â Show images . ⢠Font size - To choose the text size. ⢠Default encoding - If text characters are not show n correctly, you may choose another encoding according to language. ⢠Automatic bookmarks - To disable automatic b ookmark collec ting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automati c bookmarks but hide the folder from the Bookmarks view, sele ct Hide folder . ⢠Screen size - To select what is shown when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only , or Full screen . ⢠Search page - To define a Web page that w ill be downloaded when you select Navigation options â Open search page in the Bookmarks view, or when browsing. ⢠Volume - If you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web p ages, select a volume level. ⢠Rendering - If you want the page layout show n as accurately as possib le when in Small screen mode, select By quality . I f you do not want exte rnal cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and their preferences for frequently used content. ⢠Cookies - To enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. ⢠Java/ECMA script - To enable or disable the use of scripts. ⢠Security warnings - To hide or show security notifications. ⢠Conf. DTMF sending - Choose whethe r you want to confirm before the phone sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also âÂÂDT MF tonesâÂÂ, p. âÂÂ25â . ⢠Wallet - On to open the wallet automatically wh en a compatible browser page is opened. See Wallet , p. âÂÂ75â . R0915_en.book Pag e 72 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 73 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Organiser Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages, press and select Organiser â Calculator. Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calc ulations. To save a number in the memory (indicated by M ), select Options â Memory â Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Opti ons â Memory â Recall . To clear a number in memory, select Options â Memory â Clear . Calculating percentages 1 Enter a number for which you want to calcu l ate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Notes Press and selec t Organiser â Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compatible devices and plain text files (TXT format) that you receive can be saved to N otes. R0915_en.book Pag e 73 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 74 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Go to - adding shortcuts Default shortc uts : opens Calendar , opens Inbox an d opens Notes . To store shortcuts, link s to your favourite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on, press and select Organiser â Go to . Shortcuts can be added only fr om the individual applications, like Gallery. Not all applicat ions have this func tion. 1 Select an item from an application to which you w ant to add a shortcut. 2 Select Add to 'Go to' . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item to which it is pointing, for examp le, from one folder to another. ⢠To change the identifier in the lower left corner of th e shortcut icon, select Options â Shortcut icon . Deleting a shortcut Select the shortcut and pr ess . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an application or a docume nt which has a shortcut in the Go to, the shortcut icon of the removed item will be di mmed in the Go to v iew. The shortcut can be deleted next time you try to open the shortcut. Converter - converting measures Options in Converter: Select unit / Chan ge currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . To convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ), press and select Organiser â Converter . Note that the Converter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding erro rs may occ ur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use, and press OK . R0915_en.book Pag e 74 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 75 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 2 Scroll to the first Uni t field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert, and press OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and ente r the value yo u want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Setting a base currency and exchange rates Tip! To change the conversion order, enter the value in the second Amount fi eld. The r esult is shown in the first Amount fiel d. Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency deter m ines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1 Select Converter â Option s â Currency rates . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options â Set as base curr. . Tip! To rename a currency, go to the Currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options â Rename currency . Note: When you change base currency, you must key in the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency , and key in a new rate, that is , how many units of the currency equal one unit of the base currency you have selected. After you have inserted all the necessa ry exchange rates, you can make curren cy conversions. Wallet Press and select Organiser â Wallet . Wallet provides you with a storage area for your personal information, such as credit and debit card numbers, addresses and other useful data, for example, user names a nd passwords. R0915_en.book Pag e 75 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 76 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. The information stored in the wallet can be retrieved while browsing to aut omatically fill in online forms on browser pages, for example, when the service asks for credit card details. Data in the wallet is encrypted and protec ted with a wallet code that you define. Wallet will automatically close after 5 minutes. Enter the wallet code to regain access to the contents. You can change this automati c time-out period if required. See Wallet settings , p. âÂÂ78â . Options in the wallet main view: Open , Settings , Help , and Exit . Creating a wallet code Each time you open the wallet you will be prom pted for a wallet c ode. Enter the code that you have created, and press OK . When you open the wallet for the first time, you must create your own wallet code: 1 Enter a code of your choice (4-10 alpha numeric characters ), and press OK . 2 You will be prompted to verify the code. Enter the same code, and p ress OK . Do not give your wallet code to a nyone else. If you enter the wallet code incorrectly on three consecutive occasio ns, the wallet application is blocked for five minutes. The block time increa ses if further incorrect wallet codes are entered. If you forget your wallet code, you will ha ve to res et the code, and you will lose all information stored in the wallet. Resetting the wallet and wallet code , p. âÂÂ78â . Storing personal card details 1 Select the Cards category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select a type of card from t he list, and press . ⢠Payment cards - Credit and debit cards. ⢠Loyalty cards - Membership and store cards. ⢠Online acc. car ds - Personal user names and pa sswords to online serv ices. ⢠Address cards - Basic contac t details for home/office. R0915_en.book Pag e 76 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 77 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠User info cards - Customised personal preferences for online services. 3 Select Options â New card . An empty form opens. 4 Fill in the fi elds, and press Done . You can also receive card information directly to the phone from a ca rd issuer or service provider (if they offer this service). You will be notified whic h category the card belongs to. Save or discard the card. You can view and rename a saved card, but you cannot edit it. You can open, edit, or delete the fields in th e card. Any changes will be saved upon exi ting. Creating personal notes Personal notes are a means of storing sensit ive informa tion, for exa mple, a bank account number. You can access th e data in a personal note from the browser. You can also sen d the note as a mes sage. 1 Select the Personal notes category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options â New card . An empty note opens. 3 Press - to start writing. Press to clear characters. 4 Press Done to save. Creating a wallet profile Once you have stored your pers onal details, you can combine them together into a wall et profile. You can use a wallet profile to re trieve wallet data fro m different cards and categories to the browser. For examp le, when you are filling in a form. 1 Select the Wal let profiles category from the main wallet menu, and pre ss . 2 Select Options â New profile . A new wallet profile form opens. 3 Fill in the fields or select an option from the listed items. R0915_en.book Pag e 77 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 78 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Example: By uploading your payme nt card det ails you do not need to enter the card number and expiry date each time you need them (depending on the content being browsed). Also, you can retrieve you r user name and password stored as an access card when connecting to a mobile service that requires authentication. ⢠Profile name - Choose and enter a name for the profile. ⢠Payment card , Loyalty card , Online access card , Shipping address , ⢠Billing addres s - By default this is the same as th e Ship ping address. If you require a different address, select one from the Addres s card category. ⢠User info card , ⢠Receive e- receipt - Select a destination from the Address card category. ⢠Deliver e-receipt and ⢠RFID sending - Set to On or Off . Defines whether or not your unique phone identification is sent with the wallet profile. 4 Press Done . Viewing ticket details You can receive n otifications of tickets purc hased online through the browser. Received notifications are stored in the wa llet. To view the notifications : 1 Select the Tickets category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options â View . None of the fields within th e notification can be modified. Wallet settings From the main wallet menu, select Options â Settings : ⢠Wallet code - Change your wallet code. You will be prompted to enter the current c ode, create a new code, and verify the new code. ⢠RFID - Set the phone ID co de, type, and sending options. ⢠Automatic close - Change the automatic time-out period (1-60 minutes). After the time-out period has elapsed, the wallet code mus t be re -en ter ed t o ga in acc ess to t he contents. Resetting the wallet and wallet code This operation erases all contents of the wallet. R0915_en.book Pag e 78 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Organiser 79 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. To reset both the contents of the wallet and the wallet code: 1 Enter *#7 370925538# in the standby mode. 2 Enter the phone lock code, and press OK . See Security , p. âÂÂ101â . When opening the wallet again, you must en ter a new wallet code. Creating a wallet code , p. âÂÂ76â . R0915_en.book Pag e 79 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 80 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. IM - Instant Messaging (chat) Press and select Tools â IM . Instant messaging is a network service which allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion fo rums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers main tain IM servers that you can log in to once you have registered to an IM service. Options in the IM main vi ew: Open , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , Exit . Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/or service provider. Service prov iders will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Receiving IM settings Tip: To log in automatically when you start IM, without having to enter your user ID and password each time, select Options â Settings â Server settings â IM login type â Automatic . You must save the sett ings to access the se rvice that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message, a so-called smart messag e, from the network operator or service provider that offers the IM service. See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52âÂÂ. You can also enter the settings manually. See Chat server settings , p. âÂÂ86â . Connecting to an IM server 1 Open IM to have your phone connect to the IM se rver in use. To change the IM server in use and save new IM servers, see Chat server settings , âÂÂ86â . Once the connection has been established: R0915_en.book Pag e 80 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 81 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 2 Enter your user ID and pass word, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, sele ct Options â Login . You cannot send or receive me ssages while you are offline. 3 To log out, select Options â Logo ut . Modifying your IM settings Select Options â Settingsâ IM se ttings: Options in the Conversations list: Open , Delete , Add to IM contacts , New conversation , Set au to reply on , Blocking options , End conversation , Login , Settings , Help , Exit . ⢠Use screen name (shown only if IM groups suppor ted by the server) - To enter a nickname (up to10 characters), select Yes . ⢠IM presen ce - To allow others to see if you are online, select Active for all . ⢠Allow messages from - To allow mess ages from all, selec t All. ⢠Allow invitations from - To allow invitations only fr om your IM contacts, select IM contacts only . IM invitations are sent by IM contac ts who want you to join their groups. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed - To select the speed a t which new messages are displayed. ⢠Sort IM contacts - To sort your IM contacts Alphabetically or By online status. ⢠Availability reloading - To choose how to update in formation about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automatic or Ma nual . Searching for IM groups and users ⢠To search for groups, in the IM groups view, sel ect Options â Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). ⢠To search for users, in t he IM contac ts view, select Opti ons â Search . You can search by User's name , Us er ID, Phone num ber , and E-mail address . R0915_en.book Pag e 81 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 82 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Joining and leaving an IM group ⢠To join a IM grou p that you have sa ved, scroll to the group, and press . ⢠To join an IM group not on the list, bu t for which you know the group ID , select Options â Join new group . Enter the group ID, and press . ⢠To leave the IM group, select Options â Leave IM group . Chatting Once you have joined an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. Options while chatting: Send , Send private msg. , Reply , Forward , Insert smiley , Send invita tion , Leave IM group , Add to banned list , Group , Record convers. / Stop recording , Help , and Exit . ⢠To send a message, write the message in the message editor field, and press . ⢠To send a privat e message to participant, select Options â Send private msg . , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, selec t the message and select Options â Reply . ⢠To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options â Send invitation , select the contacts you want to in vite, write the invitation message, and press . ⢠To prevent receiving messages fro m certain participants, select Options â Blocking options and select: ⢠Add to blocked list - to block messages from the currently selected participant . ⢠Add ID to li st manually - to enter the user ID of the participant. Enter the ID and press . ⢠View blocked li st - to see the participants wh ose messages are being blocked. ⢠Unblock - to select the user that you want to remove from the blocked list. Press . R0915_en.book Pag e 82 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 83 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Recording chats Options in the Recorded chats view: Open , Delete , Send , Mark/ Unmark , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , Exit . ⢠To record to a file the messages that are exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Options â Record convers. , enter a name for the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, select Options â Stop recording . The recorded conversation files are automatically saved in the Recorded chats . ⢠To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation and press . Viewing and starting conversations Options when viewing a conversation: Send , Add to IM contacts , Insert smiley , Forward , Record convers. / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , Exit Go to the Conversations view to see a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . ⢠To continue the conversation, write your message and press . ⢠To return to the conversations list wi thout closing the co nversation, press Back . ⢠To close the conversation, select Options â End conve rsation . Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit Chat. To start a new conversation , select Options â New conversation : ⢠Select recipient - To see a list of your chat contacts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that you want to start a conversation with, and press . Glossary: The user ID is provided by the service provider to those who register to this service. ⢠Enter user ID - To en ter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation with, and press . To save a conversation participant to your IM contacts, scroll to the participant and select Options â Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Opt ions â Se t auto reply on . Enter the text and press Done . You can still receive messages. R0915_en.book Pag e 83 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 84 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. IM contacts Go to the IM contacts to retrieve chat contac t lists from the server, or to add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previous ly used chat cont act list will be retrieved from the server auto matically. ⢠To create a new conta ct, select Options â New IM contactâ Enter m anually . Fill in the Nickname and User ID fields, and press Done . ⢠To move a contact from a list on the server to the retrieved li st, select Options â New IM contact â Move from other list . Options in the IM contacts view: Open conversation , Open , Change contact list , Reload user availab. , Belongs to groups , New IM contact , Move to other list , Edit , Delete , Switch tracking on , Blocking options , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠To change the ch at contact list, select Options â Change contact list . ⢠Select Options : ⢠Open conversati on - To start a new conversation or continue an ongoing conversation with the contact. ⢠Switch tracking on - To have the phone notify you every time the chat contact goes online or offline. ⢠Belongs to groups - To see which groups the chat contact has joined. ⢠Reload us er availab. - To update information about whether the contact is online or offline. The online status is shown by an indicator next to the cont act name. This option is not available if you have set the Availability reloading to Automatic in IM settings . Managing IM groups Options in the IM groups view: Open , Join new group , Create new group , Leave IM group , Group , Search , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have either saved or are currently joined to . Scroll to a group, and select Options â Group : ⢠Save - To save an unsaved group that you are currently joined to. ⢠View participants - To see who are currently joined to the group. R0915_en.book Pag e 84 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 85 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. ⢠Details - To see the group ID, topic, participan ts, administrators of the group (shown only if you have the editing rights), the list of banned participants (shown only if you have the editing rights), and whether whispering is allowed in the group. ⢠Settings - To view and edit the chat group settings. See Creating a new IM group , p âÂÂ85â . Administrating an IM group Creating a new IM group Select IM groups â Options â Create new gr oup . Enter the settings for the group. You can edit the settings for an IM group if you have administrator rights to the group. The user who creates a group is automati cally given administrator rights to it. ⢠Group name -, Group topic -, ⢠Welcome note - To add a note that the participants see when they join the group, ⢠Group size - To define the maximum number of members allowed to join the group, ⢠Allow search - , ⢠Editing rights - To define the chat group partic ipants to whom you want to give administration rights permissi on to invite contacts t o jo in the IM group and edit the group settings. ⢠Group members - See Adding and removing group members , p. âÂÂ85â . ⢠Banned list - Enter the participants that are not allowed to join the IM group. ⢠Allow private msgs. - To allow messag ing between selected participants o nly. ⢠Group ID - The group ID is created auto matically and cannot be changed. Adding and removing group members ⢠To add members to a group, select IM groups , scroll to an IM group, and select Options â Group â Settin gs â Group members â Selected only or All . R0915_en.book Pag e 85 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
IM - Instant Messaging (chat) 86 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To remove a member from the IM group, scroll to the member, a nd select Options â Remove . To remove all members, select Options â Remove all . Chat server settings Select Options â Settings â Server settings . You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider th at offers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider, when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or password, contact your service provider. ⢠To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default server . ⢠To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers â Options â New server . Enter the following settings: ⢠Server name - Enter the name for the chat server. ⢠Access point in use - Select the access point yo u want to use for the server. ⢠Web address - Enter the URL address of the IM server. ⢠User ID - Enter your user ID. ⢠Password - Enter your login password. R0915_en.book Pag e 86 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 87 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Connectivity Bluetooth connection Bluetooth enables wireless connections to s end images, video clips, music and sound clips and notes, or to connect wirelessly to Blue tooth enabled, compatible devices such as computers. Since Bluetooth devices communica te using radio waves, your phone and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in di rec t line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metr es of ea ch other, although the c onnection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Blueto oth Speci fication 1.1 supporting the following profiles: Generic Access Profil e, Serial Port Profile, Dial-up Networki ng Profile, Headset Profile, Handsfree Profile, Generic Object Exchange Pr ofile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, and Basic Imaging Profile. To en sure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nok ia appr oved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to de termine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features that use Bluetooth te chnology, or allow such featur es to run in the background while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power and reduces the battery life. Press and select Connect. â Bluetooth . You are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phone. Bluetooth settings ⢠Bluetooth - On/ Off R0915_en.book Pag e 87 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 88 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠My phone's visibility - Shown to all : your phone can be found by other Bluetooth devices, or Hidden : your phone cannot be found by other devices. Icons for different Bluetooth devices: - Computer - Phone - Audio/video - Headset - Other ⢠My phone's name - Define a Bluetooth name for your phone. After you have set Bluetooth to be active and chan ged My phone's visi bility to Shown to all , your phone and this name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Sending data using Bluetooth There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a time. 1 Open an application where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another comp atible devi ce, open the Gallery application. 2 Select the item, for example an image, and select Options â Send â Via Bluetooth . Tip! When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Bluetooth addresses (device addresses). To find the unique Bluetooth address of your phone, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. The phone starts to se arch for devices within range. Bluetooth enabled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the Bluetooth name of the device, the device type, or a short name. Tip! If you have searched for Bluetooth devi ces earlier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list is cleared. ⢠To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a connection to one of the devices already found. 3 Scroll to the device with which you want to connect, and press Select . 4 Pairing (if required by the other devi ce) Glossary: Pairing means authentication. The us ers of the Bluetooth enabled devices should agree what the passcode is and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that do not have a user interface h ave a factory-set passcode. ⢠If the other device requires pairing before data can be tr ansmitted, a tone sounds an d you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1 -16 characters long, numeric) and agree with the owner of the other Bluetooth device to use the sa me code. The passcode is used only once. R0915_en.book Pag e 88 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 89 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tip! To send text using Bluetooth (instead of text messages), go to Notes, write the text, and select Options â Se nd â via Bluetooth . ⢠After pairing, the device is sa ved to the Paired devices view. When the connection has been established, the note Se nding data is shown. The Drafts folder in Mess aging does no t store messages sent using Bluetooth. Checking the status of the Bluetooth connection ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, Bluetooth is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is tr ying to connect to the other dev ice. ⢠When is shown continuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Pairing devices Tip! To define a short name (nickname or alias), scrol l to the device and select Optio ns â Assign short name in the Paired devices view. This name helps you to recognise a certain device during device search or when a device requests a connection. Paired devices are easier to recognise, they ar e indicated by in the device search. In the Bluetooth main view, press to o p en the Paired devices view ( ). ⢠To pair with a device, select Options â New paire d device . The phone starts a device search. Scroll to the device, and press Select . Exchange passcodes, see step 4 (Pairing), p. âÂÂ88â . ⢠To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options â Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options â Delete all . Tip! If you are currently connected to a de vice and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately , but the connection remains active. ⢠To set a device to be authorised or una uthorised, scroll to a device, and select Opt ions : Set as authorised - Connections between your phon e and this dev ice can be made without your knowledge. No se parate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible Bluetooth head set or PC, or devices that belong to some one you trust. The ic on is added next to authorised devices in the Paired devices view. Set as unauthorised - Connection requests from this device need to be accepted separately every time. R0915_en.book Pag e 89 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 90 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Receiving data using Bluetooth When you receive data using Bluetooth, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the Bluetooth message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Blueto oth messag es are indicated by . See Inbox - receiving messages , p. âÂÂ5 1â . Switching off Bluetooth To switch off Bluetooth, select Bluetooth â Off . PC connections - using Bluetooth or USB You can use your phone with a varie ty of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia PC Suite you can, fo r example, synchronise contacts, calendar and To-do no tes betwe en your ph one and a co mpatib le PC. For fu rther information on how to install Nokia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP), see the UserâÂÂs Guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nokia PC Suite he lp in the âÂÂInstallâ section on the CD- ROM. Using the CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch after you have in serted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: Op en Windows Explorer, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD- ROM, and select AutoPlay. Using your phone as a modem You can use your phone as a modem to send and receive e-mails, or to connect to the Internet with a compatible PC by using a Blue tooth connection, or a data cable. Detailed R0915_en.book Pag e 90 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 91 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. installation instructions can be found in th e UserâÂÂs Guide f or Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Connection manager You may have multiple data co nnections active at the same time when you are using your phone in GSM and UMTS networks. Press and select Connect. â Conn. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Connection manager, you can see a list of: Options in the Connection manager main view when there are one or more connections: Details , Disconnect , Disconnect all , Help and Exit . ⢠open data connections: data calls ( ), and packet data connections ( ) ⢠the status of each connection ⢠the amount of data upload ed and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠the duration of each connectio n (shown for data calls only). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, round ing off for billing, and so forth. ⢠To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options â Disconnect . ⢠To close all currently open connections, select Options â Disconnect all . Viewing data connection details To view the details of a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options â Details . ⢠Name - The name of the Internet access poin t (IAP) in use, or âÂÂModem connectionâ if the connection is a dial-up connection. ⢠Bearer - The type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet data. ⢠Status - The current status of the connection: Connecti ng , Conn.(inact.) , Conn.(a ctive) , On hold , Discon nctng. , or Disconn ected . ⢠Received - The amount of data, in by tes, received to the phone. ⢠Sent - The amount of data, in bytes, sent from the phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 91 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 92 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Duration - The length of time tha t the connection has been open. ⢠Speed - The current speed of b oth sending and receiving data in %U kB/s (kilobytes per second). ⢠Name - Access point na me used o r Dial-up - the dial-up number used. ⢠Shared (not shown if the connection is not sh ared) - The number of applicati ons using the same connection. Sync - remote synchronisation Press and select Connect. â Sy nc . The Sync application enable s you to synchronise your calendar, and contacts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation application uses Sync ML technology for sy nchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, please contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone data with. You may receive Sync settings in a special text message. See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . Creating a new synchronisation pro file Options in the Remote sync main view: Synchronise , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Delete , View log , Set as default , Help , and Exit . 1 If no profiles have been defined, the phone asks if you want to cre ate a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addi tion to existing ones, select Options â New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default se tting values or copy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name - Write a descriptive name for the profile. Data bearer - Select the connection type: Web or Bluetooth . Access point - Select an access point you want to use for the data connection. R0915_en.book Pag e 92 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 93 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Host address - Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port - Contact your service provider or syst em administrator for the correct values. User name - Your user ID for the synchronisatio n server. Contact your service provider or system administrato r for your correct ID. Password - Write your password. Contact your se rvice provider or system administrator for the correct value. Allow sync requests - Select Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Accept all sync reqs. - Select No if you want the phone to ask you before a synchronisation initial ised by the server is started. Network authe ntic. (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web ) - Select Yes to enter a network user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. Press to se lect: Contacts , Calendar , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchron ise the select ed database. ⢠Remote database - Select the synchronis ation type Normal (two-way synchronisation), To server only , or To phone only . ⢠Enter a correct path to the remote calendar , address book, or notes database on the server. 3 Press Back to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronising data In the Sync main view, you can see the differ ent synchronisation profiles, and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Op tions â Sync hronise . The status of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchronisation be fore it is finished, press Cancel . R0915_en.book Pag e 93 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Connectivity 94 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 You ar e notified when the synchronisatio n is complete. After synchronisation is complete , select Options â View log to open a log file show ing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplet e ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronised) in the phone or on the server. R0915_en.book Pag e 94 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 95 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Tools Settings To change settings, press and select Tools â Setti ngs . Scroll to a setting group, and press to o pen it. Scroll to a setti ng you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language - Changing the language of the displa y texts in your phone will als o affect the format used for date and time and the se parators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the display text language, the phone restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or W riting lan guage affects every application in your phone and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language - Changing the language af fects the characters and special charac ters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary - You can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the phone. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note or logo - The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters), or Image to select a photo or pict ure from Gallery . Orig. phone se ttings - You can reset some of the setting s to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See Security , Phone and SIM , p. âÂÂ101â . After resetting the Fig. 12 Adjusting the display brightness. R0915_en.book Pag e 95 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 96 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. settings, the phone may take a longer ti me to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode You can assign keypad shortcuts for the di fferent keypr esses in the standby mode: is the Left selection key , pressing is the same as N avigation key right , and is the same as Selection key . You cannot have a shortcut to an application that you ha ve installed. Operator logo - This setting is visible only if you ha ve received and saved an operator logo. You can choose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness - You can change the brightness of the display to lighter or darker. The brighness of the display is automaticall y adjusted ac cording to the environment. Screen saver timeout - The screen saver is activated when the timeout period is over. Light t ime-out - Select a timeout after which the backlight will be switched off. Call settings Send my caller ID (network service) - You can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are callin g; or the value may be set by your network operator or service provid er when you make a subscription ( Set by network ). Call waiting (network service) - If you have activa t ed call waiting, the network will notify you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the networ k to deactivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Reject call wi th SMS - Se lect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See Answering or rejecting a call , p. âÂÂ23â . Fig. 13 The screen saver changes to show the number of new messages or missed calls. R0915_en.book Pag e 96 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 97 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Message text - Write a text to be sent in a te xt messag e when you reject a call. Image in vide o call - You can deny video sending when you receive a video call. Select a still image to be displayed instead of video. Tip! To change the settings for call diverting, press and select Tools â Settings â Call divert . See Call diverting , p. âÂÂ104â . Automatic redial - Select On , and your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuc cessful call attempt. Press to st op automatic redialling. Summary after call - Activate this setting if you wa nt the phone to briefly display the approximate duration of the last call. Speed dialling - Select On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys ( - ) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also Speed dialling a phone number , p. âÂÂ22â . Anykey answer - Select On , and you can answer a n incoming call by briefly pressing any key, except , , , and . Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in standby mode. Line in use (network service) - This setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text mess ages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you se lect Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When lin e 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Line change (network service) - To prevent line selection, select Line change â Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your phone supports packet data connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. See also Essential indicators , p. âÂÂ15â . To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of ac cess points, such as: R0915_en.book Pag e 97 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 98 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠MMS access point to, fo r example, se nd and receive multimedia messages, Glossary: GPRS , General Packet Radio Service, uses packet data technology where information is sent in short packets of data over the mobile network. ⢠access point for the Web application to view WML or XHTML pages, and ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to, for example, send and receive e-mail. Check the kind of an access point you need wi th your service provider for the service you wish to access. For availability and subscripti on to packet data connection services, contact your network operator or service provider. Packet data connections in GS M and UMTS networks When you are using your phone in GSM and UMTS networks it is possible to have multiple data connections active at the same time; access points can share a data connection; and data connections remain active (for example, during voice calls). For information on how to see how many data connections are active, see Connection manager , p. âÂÂ91â . See also network indicators in Essential indicators , p. âÂÂ15â . The following indicators may appear below the signal indicator, depending on which network you are using: - GSM network, packet data is available in the network. - GSM network, packet data connection is active, data is being transferred. - GSM network, multiple packe t data connections are active. - GSM network, packet data connection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) - UMTS network, pa cket data is available in the network. - UMTS network, packet data connection is active, data is being transferred. - UMTS network, multiple pack et data connections are active. - UMTS network, pa cket data connection is on hold. R0915_en.book Pag e 98 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 99 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Receiving access point settings You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may have preset access point settings in your ph one. See Receiving logos, tones, business cards, calendar entries, and settings , p. âÂÂ52â . ⢠To create a new access point, select Tools â Settings â Conne ction â Access points . An access point may be set to b e protecte d ( ) by your network operator or servic e provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Options in the Access points list: Edit , New access point , Delete , Help , an d Exit . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provid er. Connection name - Giv e a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer - Depending on what data connection yo u select, only cer t ain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defi ned or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, un less you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. Options when editing access point settings: Change , Advanced settings , Help , and Exit . To be able to use a data connection, the netw ork service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only) - The access point name is needed to esta blish a connection to the packet data and UMTS networks. You obtain th e access point name from your network operator or service provider. Tip! See also Receiving MMS and e- mail settings , p. âÂÂ51â , Settings for e-mail , p. âÂÂ59â , and Accessing the Web , p. âÂÂ66â . User name - The user name may be needed to ma ke a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The user name is often case-sensitive. Prompt password - If you must enter a new password ev ery time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the phone, choose Yes . Password - A password may be needed to ma ke a data connection, and is us ually provided by the service provider. The pass word is often case-sensitive. R0915_en.book Pag e 99 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 1 1:46 AM
Tools 100 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Authentication - Normal or Secure . Homepage - Depending on what you are setting up , write either the Web address, or the address of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options â Advanced sett ings to change the following settings: Glossary: DNS - Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates d omain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195 Network type - Select the Internet protocol type to be used: IPv4 settings or IPv6 settings . Phone IP address - The IP address of your phone. Name servers - Primary name server: The IP address of th e primary DNS server, Second. Name server: The IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy serv. ad dress - Define the address for the proxy server. Proxy port numb er - Enter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affe ct all access points usin g a packet data connection. Packet data conn. - If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the phone registers to the packet da ta network. Also, starting an active pack et data connection is quicker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When needed , the phone uses a packet data connection on ly if you start an application or action that needs it. If there is no packet data coverage and you have chosen When available , the phone will periodically try to establish a packet data connection. Access point - The access point name is needed to use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from yo ur network operator or service provider in a configuration message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM or US IM card. Thes e settings can be saved to yo ur phone and viewed or deleted in Configurations. R0915_en.book Pag e 100 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 101 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Date and time Tip! See also the Language settings, p. âÂÂ95â . See Clock settings , p. âÂÂ16â . Security Phone and SI M PIN (Personal Identification Nu mber) code (4 to 8 dig its) protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PI N code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about PUK code in this section. UPIN code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. The UPIN code pro tects the USIM card against unauthorised use. PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) su pplied with some SIM cards, is required to access some functions in your phone. Lock code (5 digits) can be used to lock the phone to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of your phone, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) and PUK2 codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. UPUK code may be supplied with the USIM card an d is needed to unblock a UPIN code. Wallet code is needed to use the wa llet services. See Wallet , p. âÂÂ75â . R0915_en.book Pag e 101 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 102 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. PIN code request - When active, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Deactivating the PIN co de request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code - You can change the lock code, PIN co de, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . Tip! To lock the phone manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Avoid using access codes similar to the emer gency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Autoloc k period - You can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls in Offline profile to certain emergency numbers programmed into yo ur phone are still possible. Options in the Fixed dialling view: Open , Call , Activ. fixed dialling / Deact. fixed dialling , New contact , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Find , Mark/ Unmark , Help , and Exit . Lock if SIM changed - You can set the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknown, n e w S IM c a r d i s i n s e r t e d in t o y o u r p h o n e . T h e phone maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Fixed dialling - You can restrict calls a nd text me ssages from your phone to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. To view the list of Fixed dia lling numbers, press and select Tools â Settings â Security â Phone and SIMâ Fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the Fixed dialling list, select Options â New contac t or Add from Contacts . When you use fixed dialling, packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In this case, the message cent re number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number have to be included on the fixed dialling list. Note: When securi ty features that restrict calls are in use (such as call barring, closed user group and fixed dialling) call s sti ll may be possible to the official emergency numbers programmed into your phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 102 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 103 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Closed user group (network service) - To specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Confirm SIM services (network s ervice) - To set th e phone to display confirmatio n messages when you are us ing a SIM card service. Certif. management Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origins of software. In the Certificate management main view, you ca n see a list of authority cert ificates that have been stored in your phone. Press to s ee a list of personal certi ficates, if available. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML or WML pages and installed software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates should be used if y ou want to connect to an online b ank or another site or remote server for ac tions that involve transferring c onfidential information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malic ious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation cons iderably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from incr eased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself ; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased securi ty to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certificate shou ld be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. Viewing certi ficate details - ch ecking authentici ty You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server cert ificate have been checked. You will be notified on the phone display if the identity of the server is not authent ic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your phone. R0915_en.book Pag e 103 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 104 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the certificate management main view: Ce rtificate details , Delete , Trust settings , Mark /Unmark , Help , and Exit . To check certificat e details, scroll to a certificat e, and select Option s â Certificate details . When you open certificate details, Certificat e management checks the validity of the certificate, and one of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not tru sted - You have not set any application to use the certificate. See Changing the trust settings , p. âÂÂ104â . ⢠Expired certificate - The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet - The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted - The certificate cannot be used . Contact the certificate issuer. Changing the trust settings Before changing any certificate settings , you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the cert ificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options â Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that ca n use the selected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installation : Yes - The certificate is able to ce rtify the origin of new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Interne t : Yes - The certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes - The certificate is able to certify the origin of new Java application. Select Options â Edit trust setting to change the value. Call diverting Icon: When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. 1 To direct your incoming calls to your vo ice mailbox or another phone number, press and select Tools â Settings â Call diver t . For details, contact your service prov ider. 2 Select which calls you want to divert: Voice calls , or Data and video c alls . R0915_en.book Pag e 104 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 105 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 3 Select the desired divert option. For example, If busy to dive rt voice calls when your number is busy or when you reject incoming calls. 4 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several divert options can be active at the same time. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring (network service) Call barring allows you t o restri ct the calls that ca n be made or received with the phone. To change the settings, you n eed the barring password from yo ur service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all ca lls, including data calls. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls still may be possi ble to certain official emergenc y numbers. Network Nokia 6630 can automatically switch betw een the GSM a nd UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Glossary: Roaming agreement - An agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Network mode (shown only if supported by the oper ator) - Select which network will be used. If you select Dual mode , the phone will use the GSM or UMTS network automatically according to the network parameters and th e roaming agreements between the network operators. Contact yo ur network operator for mo re information. Warning: If you set the phone to use only th e GSM network, you will not be able to make any calls, including emergency ca lls , or use other features requiring a network connection, if the selected network is not available. Operator selecti on - Select Automatic to set the phone to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the netw ork from a list of network s. R0915_en.book Pag e 105 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 106 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display - Sele ct On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN ) technology and to activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: - a headset is connected. - a loopset is connected. - headset unavailable, connection to a Bluetooth headset has been lost. Select the enhancement: Headset , Loopset , Bluetooth handsfree , or Car kit . ⢠Select Default profile to set the profile that you want activated each time you co nnect a certain enhancement to your phone. See Profiles - setting tones , p. âÂÂ12â . ⢠Select Automatic answer to set the phone to answer an incoming call auto matically after five sec onds. If th e Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled. Voice commands Press and select Tools â Voice com. . Voice commands allows you t o add, delete, and control voice commands in your phone. Voic e commands are recorded the same way as voice tags. See Adding a voice tag to a phone number , p. âÂÂ30â . Adding a voice command to an application You can have only one voice command per application. 1 Select the application to which you want to add a voice command. To add a new application to the list, select Options â New application . 2 Select Options â Add voice command . See Adding a voice tag to a phone number , p. âÂÂ30â . R0915_en.book Pag e 106 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 107 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Application manager Press and select Tools â Manager . You c an install two types of applications and software to your phone: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). Do not download PersonalJava⢠applications to your phone as they cannot be installed. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view, scroll to the installation file, and press to start installation. ⢠Other applications and software s uitable for the Symbian operating system ( ). The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specif ically designed for Nokia 6630. Installation files may be tr ansferred to your phone from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to yo u in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetooth. You can use No kia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your phone or a memory card. If you are using Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, place the file on a memory car d (local disk). Installing applications and software Icons: - .sis application - Java application - application is not fully installed - application is installed on the memory card. Important: Only install applications from sour ces that offer adequate protection against harm ful software. ⢠Before installation, select Options â View detai ls to view information su ch as the application type, version number, and the su pplier or manufacturer of the application. ⢠Before installation, select Options â View certificate to display the security certificate details of the applicatio n. See Certif. management , p. âÂÂ103â . ⢠If you install a file that contai ns an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original instal lation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the ap plic ation again from the original installation file or th e back- up copy. R0915_en.book Pag e 107 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 108 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suite to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you will be asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the se rver. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 Open Application manager, and sc roll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the phone memory or th e memory card, select the application, and press to start the installation. 2 Select Options â Install . Tip! While browsing, you can download an installation file and install it without closing the connection. During installation, the phon e shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Cont inue install ation only if yo u are sure of the origins and contents of the application. Options in the Applications main view: Install , View details , Go to Web addr ess , View certifica te , Send , Remove , App. downloads , View log , Send log , Update , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and press . ⢠To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Options â Go to web address , if available. ⢠To see what software pack ag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options â View log . ⢠T o s e n d y o u r i n s t a l l a t i o n l o g t o a h e l p d e s k s o t h a t t h e y c a n s e e w h a t h a s b e e n i n s t a l l e d or removed, select Options â Send log â Via text message , or Via e-mail (availab le only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Removing applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options â Remove . Press Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only re-install it if you have the original software pac kage or a full back-up of the removed software package. If you re move a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents crea ted with that software. R0915_en.book Pag e 108 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 109 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Note: If another software package depend s on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed softwa re package for details. Application settings ⢠Software installation - S el ec t th e k in d o f s of t wa re yo u w an t in st al le d : On , Signed only, or Off . ⢠Online certif. ch eck - Select if you want Ap plication manager to check the onli ne certificates for an application before installing it. ⢠Default web address - Default address used when checki ng online certificates. Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a network connection to be made to a specific acce ss point for downloading extra data or components. In the Applications main view, scroll to an application, and select Options â Suite settings to change sett ings related to that specific application. Activation keys - handling copyright protected files Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred, or forwarded. Press and select Tool s â Activ. keys to view the digital rig hts activation keys stored in your phone. ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connect ed to one or more media file. ⢠With expired keys ( ) you have run out of time to use the media file, or the time period for using the file is exceeded. To view th e Expired activation keys, press . ⢠To buy more usage time or extend the usage pe riod for a me dia file, select an activation key, and select Options â Activate cont ent . Activation keys cannot be updated if Web service message reception is di sabled. See Settings for Web service messages , p. âÂÂ61â . R0915_en.book Pag e 109 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 110 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To view which keys are not in use at the moment ( N ot used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files co nnect ed to them sa ved in the phone. ⢠To view detailed information such as the validity status and ability to send the file, select an activation key and press . Transfer - transferring content from another phone Press and select Tools â T ransfer to copy contacts, calendar, images, video, and sound clips using Bluetooth from a compatible Se ries 60 phone such as Nokia 6600 and Nokia 7610 to your Nokia 6630. You can use your No kia 6630 without a SIM card. Offline profile is automatically activated when the phone is switched on without a SIM c ard. This allows you to use the SIM card in another phone. Follow the instructions on the screen. To avoid duplicate entries, you can transfer the same type of information, for example contacts, from the other phone to your phone on ly once. If you want to transfer the same information again, you may need to send the Tr ansfer application again to the other device, and install it again. The copying process goes through the following steps: 1 Turn on Bluetooth in your Nokia 6630 and in the other phone. See Bluetooth connection , p. âÂÂ87â . 2 Open the Transfer application in Nokia 6630. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 3 The Data transfer application is sent to the other phone. 4 Install the Transfer application to the other phone. The application will start automatically, and is a dded to the main Menu. 5 The phones need to be pair ed. For further inform ation on pairing, see Sending data using Bluetooth , Pairing, p. âÂÂ88â . 6 Select what content you want to be copied to your Nokia 6630. R0915_en.book Pag e 110 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 111 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. 7 Content is copied from the memory and memo ry card of the other phone (if available) to your Nokia 6630. Copying time depends on th e amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel copying and continu e later. Device manager - service provider configuration Press and select Tools â Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your networ k o perator, service provider, or company information management department. These configuration settings may in clude access point settings for data connections and other settings used by differ ent applications in your phone. ⢠To connect to a serv er and receiv e config ur ation settings for your phone, select Start configuration . ⢠To allow or deny receiving of configuratio n settings from a service provider, select Enable config. or Disable config. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct set tings. ⢠Server name - Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID - Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password - Enter a password to identify your phone to the server. ⢠Access point - Select an access point to be us ed when connecting to the server. ⢠Host address - Enter the URL address of the server. ⢠Port - Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name and Password - Enter your user name and password. ⢠Allow config uration - To receive configuration settings from the server, select Yes. R0915_en.book Pag e 111 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Tools 112 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Auto-accept all reqs. . - If you wa nt the phon e to ask for confirmat ion befo re accept ing a configuration from the server, select No . R0915_en.book Pag e 112 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
Battery information 113 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Battery information Charging and Discharging Your device is powered by a re chargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cyc les. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short- circuit the batter y. Accidental sh ort-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the batte ry or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter condit ions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Al ways try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Batter y performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidi ty and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow th e device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. R0915_en.book Pag e 113 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION 114 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage ele ctronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, c leaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean th e device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses). ⢠U se only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised ante n nas, modifica tions, or attachments could damage th e device a nd may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggesti ons apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the neares t authorized service facility for service. ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may ca use interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only use enhancements approved by Noki a for use with this device. When the device is on and be ing worn on the body, always use an approved hold er o r carrying case. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmit ting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the manufact urer of the me dical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sens itive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 in. ( 1 5.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid po tential interference with the pacemaker. These re commendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: ⢠a lways keep the device more than 6 in. (15.3 cm) from their pacemake r when the device is switched on; ⢠n ot carry the device in a breast pocket; and ⢠h old the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you have any reason to susp ect that interference is taking place, switch off your device immed iately. R0915_en.book Pag e 114 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION 115 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfe re with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electroni c systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the ma nufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or ins tall the device in a vehicle. Fault y installation or s ervice may be dangerous and may invalidate any warran ty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and ope rating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liqui ds, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment a s the device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless eq uipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deploy ment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installe d and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the w ireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even de ath. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations ar e in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are o ften but not always clearly marked. They include be low deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilitie s, vehicles using lique fied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programme d functions. Because of this, connections in all condit ions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications li ke medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength . Some networks may require that a valid SIM or USIM card is properly inserted in the device. R0915_en.book Pag e 115 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION 116 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Press as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergen cy number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as p ossible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. WARNING! In Offline profile you cannot make calls, except calls to certain emergency numbers, or use features that re quire network coverage. Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERN ATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio tr ansmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIR P). These limit s are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general popula tion. The guidelines we re developed by independent scie ntific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific stud ies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all person s, regard less of age and health . The exposure standard for mobi le devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the inte rnational guidelines is 2.0 W/ kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certif ied power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is becaus e the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the pow er required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.83 W/kg. This device meets RF exposure gu idelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a c arry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn ope ration, it should not contain metal and should positio n the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are follow ed until the transmission is completed. * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged ov er ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a s ubstantial margin of safety t o give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurem ents. SAR values may vary depending on national repor ting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product inform ation at www.nokia.com. R0915_en.book Pag e 116 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
117 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. Index A access points 97 settings 99 activation keys 109 alarms alarm clock 16 calendar alarms 63 applications, Java 107 B Bluetooth connecting two devices, pairing 88 connection requests 88 connection status indicators 89 device address 88 device icons 88 factory set passcode 88 headset 106 pairing requests 88 pairing, glossary explanation 88 passcode, glossary explanation 88 switching off 90 bookmark, glossary explanation 67 brightness display 96 setting in camera 33 C cache clearing 71 calendar alarm 63 sending entries 63 stopping a calendar alarm 63 synchronising PC Suite 64 call register see log calls dialled numbers 25 duration 25 international 21 received 25 settings 96 settings for call divert 104 transferring 24 camera adjusting brightness 33 adjusting contrast 33 night mode 33 saving video clips 35 self-timer 34 sending images 33 sequence mode 34 video recorder settings 36 CD-ROM 90 certificates 103 chat see instant messaging clear screen See standby mode clock alarm 16 settings 16 snooze 16 codes 101 lock code PIN code 101 PIN2 code 101 computer connections 90 conference call 23 connection settings 97 contact c ards inserting pictures 28 storing DTMF tones 24 contrast setting in camera 33 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 29 text 49 copyright protection R0915_en.book Pag e 117 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
118 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. see activation keys cutting text 49 D data connections details 91 ending 91 indicators 15 date settings 101 digital rights management, DRM see activation keys DNS, domain name service, glossary explanation 100 E editing videos 38 adding effects 38 adding sound clips 38 adding transitions 38 custom video clips 38 e-mail 49 offline 56 opening 55 remote mailbox 53 retrieving from mailbox 54 settings 59 viewing attachments 55 F file formats JAD file JAR file 108 RealOne Player 42 SIS file 107 file manager 17 fixed dialling 102 G gallery 36 H handsfree see loudspeake r headset settings 106 I indicators 15 instant messaging 80 blocking 82 connectin g to a server 80 groups 84 individual conversations 83 recording the messages 83 sending a private message 82 sending instant messages 82 user ID, glossary explanation 83 internet access points (IAP) See access points IP address, glossary explanation 100 J Java See applications, Java L lock code 101 log erasing contents 26 filtering 26 log duration 26 loopset settings 106 loudspeaker 17 activating 17 turning off 17 M mailbox 53 media files fast forward 43 file formats 42 mute sound 43 rewind 43 memory clearing memory 25 viewing memory consumption 18 memory card 19 memory card adapter see the Quick Start Guide, reduced- size MultiMediaCard adapter menu rearranging 12 messaging e-mail 49 multimedia message 49 text message 49 R0915_en.book Pag e 118 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
119 Copyright é 2005 Nok ia. All rights reserved. movies, muvees custom muvees 40 quick muvees 40 multimedia messages 49 mute sound 43 my home city 17 P packet data connections 91 GPRS, glossary explanation 98 settings 100 pasting text 49 PC connections via Bluetooth or USB cable 90 PC Suite calendar data 64 synchronisation 90 transfering images to a PC 37 viewing phone memory data 18 personalisation 13 PIN code 101 R recording video 36 recording voice tags 30, 106 reminder See calendar, alarm remote mailbox 53 resolution, glossary explanation 34 ringing tones adding a personal ringing tone 29 receiving in a text message 53 removing a personal ringing tone 30 RSMMC, reduced-size MMC see the Quick Start Guide S security code see lock code sending calendar entries 63 contact cards, business cards 29 images 33 video clips 39 service commands 46 settings access codes 101 access points 99 Bluetooth 87 calendar 64 call barring 105 call diverting 104 certificates 103 data connections 97 date and time 101 display 96 headset 106 IM settings 80, 81, 86 language 95 lock code 101 loopset 106 original settings 95 personalising the phone 11 PIN code 101 screen saver 96 UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 wallet 78 wallet code 101 shortcuts camera 33 see the Quick Start Guide web connection 67 SIM card copying names and numbers to phone 29 messages 57 names and numbers 29 SIS file 107 SMS centre, short message service centre 57 snooze alarm clo ck 16 calendar alarm 63 software transferring a file to your device 107 sound clips 36 sounds muting a ringing to ne 23 personalising 12 recording sounds 41 R0915_en.book Pag e 119 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM
120 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. speed dialling 22 standby mode 11 synchronisation 92 T text messag e 49 text message service centre adding new 57 thumbnail images in a contact ca rd 28 time settings 101 transfering content from another phone 110 U UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 USB cable 90 USIM card see glossary explanation in the Quick Start Guide USSD commands 46 V video call 21 answering 24 rejecting 24 video clips 36 video player See RealOne Player video recorder see camera voice dialling 30, 106 voice mailbox 21 changing the phone number 21 diverting calls to voice mailbox 104 voice messages 21 voice tags 30, 106 adding 30, 106 making calls 31 volume control 17 during a call 21 loudspeaker 17 W wallet 75 entering the wallet code 76 resetting wallet code 78 settings 78 storing card details 76 viewing ticket details 78 wallet code 76, 101 web access points, see access points R0915_en.book Pag e 120 Tuesday, February 8, 2005 11:4 6 AM